快乐巴利palinanda.cc

长部 · 篇首·义注序论三节

本经目录义注复注

已对照篇首

义注

已对照篇首

序论

PTS 1.1缅 1.1已对照篇首

[他]心因悲而清凉,以慧灯破除了痴暗;

Karuṇāsītalahadayaṃ, paññāpajjotavihatamohatamaṃ;
已对照篇首

[他是]含人与天之世间的尊重者——我礼敬已解脱诸趣的善逝(sugata)。

Sanarāmaralokagaruṃ, vande sugataṃ gativimuttaṃ.
已对照篇首

佛陀也是既修习了[那法]、又现证了[它],

Buddhopi buddhabhāvaṃ, bhāvetvā ceva sacchikatvā ca;
已对照篇首

才趣得[佛的境界]的——我礼敬那离垢的、无上的法。

Yaṃ upagato gatamalaṃ, vande tamanuttaraṃ dhammaṃ.
已对照篇首

善逝的诸胸生之子,[他们]是破魔军者——

Sugatassa orasānaṃ, puttānaṃ mārasenamathanānaṃ;
已对照篇首

那八[辈]之聚,我以头礼敬[之],[即]圣僧团。

Aṭṭhannampi samūhaṃ, sirasā vande ariyasaṅghaṃ.
已对照篇首

如是,由我这心意净信者[所作]的、由礼敬三宝所成的那份福——

Iti me pasannamatino, ratanattayavandanāmayaṃ puññaṃ;
已对照篇首

愿以它的威力,[令我]成为障碍善除者,

Yaṃ suvihatantarāyo, hutvā tassānubhāvena.
已对照篇首

[而]以长篇幅之经所标记的、[义]精微的、殊胜的《长部》(dīghāgama)——

Dīghassa dīghasuttaṅkitassa, nipuṇassa āgamavarassa;
已对照篇首

[即]为佛与随佛觉者所赞述的、[其]功德能引生净信的[那部阿含]——

Buddhānubuddhasaṃvaṇṇitassa, saddhāvahaguṇassa.
已对照篇首

为显明[其]义,最初由诸得自在者(vasī)之百——

Atthappakāsanatthaṃ, aṭṭhakathā ādito vasisatehi;
已对照篇首

[即]五百[位]——所结集、后来也[于第二、第三次结集中]被随结集的那部义注,

Pañcahi yā saṅgītā, anusaṅgītā ca pacchāpi.
已对照篇首

由得自在者马哈玛欣德(Mahāmahinda)带到了师子洲(Sīhaḷadīpa),

Sīhaḷadīpaṃ pana ābhatātha, vasinā mahāmahindena;
已对照篇首

为诸洲住民的利益,以师子洲语(sīhaḷabhāsā)安立了下来。

Ṭhapitā sīhaḷabhāsāya, dīpavāsīnamatthāya.
缅 1.2已对照篇首

我从那[义注]中除去师子洲语,[而将它]升入悦意之语(manoramā bhāsā)——

Apanetvāna tatohaṃ, sīhaḷabhāsaṃ manoramaṃ bhāsaṃ;
已对照篇首

[升入那]契合圣典(tanti)之法则、离于过失的[语];

Tantinayānucchavikaṃ, āropento vigatadosaṃ.
已对照篇首

[并]不违背诸长老的宗义(samaya)——[他们]是长老世系的明灯、

Samayaṃ avilomento, therānaṃ theravaṃsapadīpānaṃ;
已对照篇首

抉择极为精微、住于大寺(Mahāvihāra)者;

Sunipuṇavinicchayānaṃ, mahāvihāre nivāsīnaṃ.
已对照篇首

舍去一再重来之义,我将显明[其]义,

Hitvā punappunāgatamatthaṃ, atthaṃ pakāsayissāmi;
已对照篇首

为令善人欢喜,并为令法久住。

Sujanassa ca tuṭṭhatthaṃ, ciraṭṭhitatthañca dhammassa.
已对照篇首

戒论、头陀法(dhutadhamma),以及一切业处,

Sīlakathā dhutadhammā, kammaṭṭhānāni ceva sabbāni;
已对照篇首

连同性行(cariyā)之分判,[以及]禅与等至的广说;

Cariyāvidhānasahito, jhānasamāpattivitthāro.
已对照篇首

以及一切神通(abhiññā),还有慧的合计与抉择;

Sabbā ca abhiññāyo, paññāsaṅkalananicchayo ceva;
已对照篇首

蕴、界、处、根,以及那四圣[谛]——

Khandhadhātāyatanindriyāni, ariyāni ceva cattāri.
PTS 1.2已对照篇首

[即诸]谛,[与]缘之行相(paccayākāra)的教说,[其]理趣极清净而精微;

Saccāni paccayākāradesanā, suparisuddhanipuṇanayā;
已对照篇首

不离圣典之道,以及毗婆舍那(vipassanā)的修习——

Avimuttatantimaggā, vipassanā bhāvanā ceva.
已对照篇首

然而这一切,由于已由我在《清净道论》(Visuddhimagga)中极为清净地

Iti pana sabbaṃ yasmā, visuddhimagge mayā suparisuddhaṃ;
已对照篇首

说过了,所以在此[义注中]不再多加论究它。

Vuttaṃ tasmā bhiyyo, na taṃ idha vicārayissāmi.
已对照篇首

「此《清净道论》,正处于四阿含之中央,

‘‘Majjhe visuddhimaggo, esa catunnampi āgamānañhi;
已对照篇首

[它]将住[于其中]而显明那里如所说之义。」

Ṭhatvā pakāsayissati, tattha yathā bhāsitaṃ atthaṃ’’.
已对照篇首

[《清净道论》]正是这样造成的,所以你们应把它也取来,连同这部

Icceva kato tasmā, tampi gahetvāna saddhimetāya;
已对照篇首

义注[《吉祥悦意》(Sumaṅgalavilāsinī)]一起,了知依于《长部》之义。

Aṭṭhakathāya vijānatha, dīghāgamanissitaṃ atthanti.
Nidānakathā
已对照篇首

因缘论

缅 1.3已对照篇首

此中,所谓《长部》(dīghāgama)者:就品而言,[它]是戒蕴品、大品、波梨品[这]三品;就经而言,[是]三十四部经的合集。在它的诸品中,戒蕴品为首;在诸经中,《梵网[经]》[为首]。而《梵网经》也是以尊者阿难在第一次大结集时所说的「如是我闻」等[语]为首的因缘(nidāna)。

Tattha dīghāgamo nāma sīlakkhandhavaggo, mahāvaggo, pāthikavaggoti vaggato tivaggo hoti; suttato catuttiṃsasuttasaṅgaho. Tassa vaggesu sīlakkhandhavaggo ādi, suttesu brahmajālaṃ. Brahmajālassāpi ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādikaṃ āyasmatā ānandena paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle vuttaṃ nidānamādi.
Paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā
已对照篇首

第一次大结集论

PTS 1.3已对照篇首

而这名为「第一次大结集」的[结集],虽已编入律藏的圣典(tanti),但为[令于]因缘(nidāna)[得]善巧故,于此处也应如是了知。因为,从转法轮起、直到调伏游方者(paribbājaka)须跋陀[为止]、佛所作事已作毕的世间怙主世尊,于拘尸那罗、优婆跋多那末罗人的娑罗林中、双娑罗树之间,在毗舍佉月的满月日拂晓时分以无余涅槃界般涅槃之后——于世尊舍利分配之日,作为那已聚集的七十万比丘之僧团上座的具寿大迦叶,忆念起世尊般涅槃第七日时年老出家者须跋陀所说的那番话——「够了,贤友们,不要愁,不要悲!我们已经从那位大沙门[的管束]中彻底解脱了。我们一向被压迫着:『这对你们是许可的,这对你们是不许可的。』而如今,我们想做什么就做什么,不想做什么就不做什么。」(《小品》437)——又想到这样的僧团集会以后难得,[便思惟:]「而存在这样的情况:恶比丘们认为『教语(pāvacana)已是导师已逝[而无师]的』,得了党羽,不久便令正法隐没;而只要法与律住立着,教语便不是导师已逝的。而这是世尊所说的——

Paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāma cesā kiñcāpi vinayapiṭake tantimārūḷhā, nidānakosallatthaṃ pana idhāpi evaṃ veditabbā. Dhammacakkappavattanañhi ādiṃ katvā yāva subhaddaparibbājakavinayanā katabuddhakicce, kusinārāyaṃ upavattane mallānaṃ sālavane yamakasālānamantare visākhapuṇṇamadivase paccūsasamaye anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbute bhagavati lokanāthe, bhagavato dhātubhājanadivase sannipatitānaṃ sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassānaṃ saṅghatthero āyasmā mahākassapo sattāhaparinibbute bhagavati subhaddena vuḍḍhapabbajitena – ‘‘alaṃ, āvuso, mā socittha, mā paridevittha, sumuttā mayaṃ tena mahāsamaṇena, upaddutā ca homa – ‘idaṃ vo kappati, idaṃ vo na kappatī’ti, idāni pana mayaṃ yaṃ icchissāma, taṃ karissāma, yaṃ na icchissāma na taṃ karissāmā’’ti (cūḷava. 437) vuttavacanamanussaranto, īdisassa ca saṅghasannipātassa puna dullabhabhāvaṃ maññamāno, ‘‘ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjati, yaṃ pāpabhikkhū ‘atītasatthukaṃ pāvacana’nti maññamānā pakkhaṃ labhitvā nacirasseva saddhammaṃ antaradhāpeyyuṃ, yāva ca dhammavinayo tiṭṭhati, tāva anatītasatthukameva pāvacanaṃ hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
已对照篇首

『阿难,我为你们所教说、所制定的法与律,在我去世之后就是你们的导师。』(《长部》2.216)

‘Yo vo, ānanda, mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto, so vo mamaccayena satthā’ti (dī. ni. 2.216).
已对照篇首

『我何不结集法与律,令这教法堪于经久、长久住立呢?』

‘Yaṃnūnāhaṃ dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyeyyaṃ, yathayidaṃ sāsanaṃ addhaniyaṃ assa ciraṭṭhitikaṃ’.
已对照篇首

又,我之所以被世尊——

Yañcāhaṃ bhagavatā –
已对照篇首

『迦叶,你愿受用我这已穿旧的麻粪扫衣吗?』(《相应部》2.154)——[世尊]这样说了之后,[便]以于衣上与[他]自己共同受用[而摄受我];[又说]——

‘Dhāressasi pana me tvaṃ, kassapa, sāṇāni paṃsukūlāni nibbasanānī’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) vatvā cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogena.
缅 1.4已对照篇首

『诸比丘,我只要愿意,便离诸欲,离诸不善法,有寻、有伺,离生喜、乐,成就并住于初禅;诸比丘,迦叶也只要愿意,便离诸欲,离诸不善法,有寻、有伺,离生喜、乐,成就并住于初禅。』(《相应部》2.152)

‘Ahaṃ, bhikkhave, yāvadeva ākaṅkhāmi vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharāmi; kassapopi, bhikkhave, yāvadeva, ākaṅkhati vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatī’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.152).
已对照篇首

[我]以如此等方式,在以九次第住与六神通为别的上人法上,被[世尊]安立为与自己同等而受摄受;同样,[世尊]在空中挥手,以[我]心不粘著之性、又以月喻之行道而[对我]加以称赞——那么,对那[恩德],除了[结集法与律],还有什么别的偿债(āṇaṇya)呢?世尊岂不是如国王以授予自己的铠甲与主权[而待]那住持自己家系的儿子一般,思量『这[人]将是我正法世系的住持者』,才以这不共[他人]的摄受来摄受我,又以这样崇高的称赞来称赞我吗?」——如是思惟,[大迦叶]便为结集法与律而于诸比丘中生起了热忱。正如[圣典]所说——

Evamādinā nayena navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññāppabhede uttarimanussadhamme attanā samasamaṭṭhapanena ca anuggahito, tathā ākāse pāṇiṃ cāletvā alaggacittatāya ceva candopamapaṭipadāya ca pasaṃsito, tassa kimaññaṃ āṇaṇyaṃ bhavissati. Nanu maṃ bhagavā rājā viya sakakavacaissariyānuppadānena attano kulavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpakaṃ puttaṃ ‘saddhammavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpako me ayaṃ bhavissatī’ti, mantvā iminā asādhāraṇena anuggahena anuggahesi, imāya ca uḷārāya pasaṃsāya pasaṃsīti cintayanto dhammavinayasaṅgāyanatthaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesi. Yathāha –
已对照篇首

「于是,具寿大迦叶告诸比丘言——『贤友们,我有一次从波婆前往拘尸那罗,与约五百位比丘组成的大比丘僧团一起行于长途之道』」(《小品》437)——整个〈须跋陀品〉都应依详说而知。而它的义,我们将唯在《大般涅槃[经]》末尾[它]所来之处讲说。

‘‘Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘ekamidāhaṃ, āvuso, samayaṃ pāvāya kusināraṃ addhānamaggappaṭipanno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehī’’ti (cūḷava. 437) sabbaṃ subhaddakaṇḍaṃ vitthārato veditabbaṃ. Atthaṃ panassa mahāparinibbānāvasāne āgataṭṭhāneyeva kathayissāma.
已对照篇首

此后,[即]在那生起热忱之后,[他]说——

Tato paraṃ āha –
PTS 1.4已对照篇首

「来吧,贤友们,我们[且]结集法与律,趁非法尚未炽盛、法尚未被排拒;趁非律尚未炽盛、律尚未被排拒;趁说非法者尚未有力、说法者尚未羸弱,趁说非律者尚未有力、说律者尚未羸弱。」(《小品》437)

‘‘Handa mayaṃ, āvuso, dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyāma, pure adhammo dippati, dhammo paṭibāhiyyati; pure avinayo dippati, vinayo paṭibāhiyyati; pure adhammavādino balavanto honti, dhammavādino dubbalā honti, pure avinayavādino balavanto honti, vinayavādino dubbalā hontī’’ti (cūḷava. 437).
缅 1.5已对照篇首

诸比丘说——「那么,尊者,请长老挑选比丘。」而长老撇开了持整个九分导师教说之教理(pariyatti)的凡夫、须陀洹、斯陀含、阿那含以及纯观行的漏尽[者]比丘数百、数千位,唯摄取了持三藏一切教理诸分、已得诸无碍解、有大威力、大多已为世尊立为第一、以三明等为别的漏尽比丘——[共]差一位便满五百。正就他们而说了这[语]——「于是,具寿大迦叶挑选了差一[位满]五百的阿罗汉。」(《小品》437)

Bhikkhū āhaṃsu – ‘‘tena hi, bhante, thero bhikkhū uccinatū’’ti. Thero pana sakalanavaṅgasatthusāsanapariyattidhare puthujjanasotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmi sukkhavipassaka khīṇāsavabhikkhū anekasate, anekasahasse ca vajjetvā tipiṭakasabbapariyattippabhedadhare paṭisambhidāppatte mahānubhāve yebhuyyena bhagavato etadaggaṃ āropite tevijjādibhede khīṇāsavabhikkhūyeva ekūnapañcasate pariggahesi. Ye sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo ekenūnāni pañca arahantasatāni uccinī’’ti (cūḷava. 437).
已对照篇首

[设难:]那么,长老为何作成差一位呢?——[答:]是为了给具寿阿难长老作机会(okāsa)。因为有这位尊者也好、没有他也好,[都]不能作法的结集。因为这位尊者是有学、尚有应作之事,所以「有他也不能」。而因为十力[者]所教说的经(sutta)、应颂(geyya)等,没有一样对他是非亲见的[——由于于他是熟练现行的]。正如[圣典]所说——

Kissa pana thero ekenūnamakāsīti? Āyasmato ānandattherassa okāsakaraṇatthaṃ. Tenahāyasmatā sahāpi, vināpi, na sakkā dhammasaṅgītiṃ kātuṃ. So hāyasmā sekkho sakaraṇīyo, tasmā sahāpi na sakkā. Yasmā panassa kiñci dasabaladesitaṃ suttageyyādikaṃ appaccakkhaṃ nāma natthi. Yathāha –
已对照篇首

「八万二千[法]我从佛[处]领受,二千[法]从比丘[处领受];

‘‘Dvāsīti buddhato gaṇhiṃ, dve sahassāni bhikkhuto;
已对照篇首

[共]八万四千[法蕴],是我所熟练的诸法。」(《长老偈》1027)

Caturāsīti sahassāni, ye me dhammā pavattino’’ti. (theragā. 1027);
已对照篇首

所以,没有他[也]不能[作]。

Tasmā vināpi na sakkā.
PTS 1.5已对照篇首

[设难:]若是这样,[阿难]纵然是有学,由于于法的结集大有助益,本应被长老挑选,那为何没有被挑选呢?——[答:]是由于要避开他人的非议。因为长老对具寿阿难极为亲近无隔;正因如此,即使在[阿难]头上已生白发之后,[他]仍以「孩子」之语教诫他:「这孩子真不知分量(mattā,[即]限度)啊!」(《相应部》2.154)而这位尊者出身释迦族,是如来的[从]弟、[即]叔父之子。于此,有些比丘会以为这如同随欲而行(chandā āgamana,[即]徇私),便可能非议说:「长老撇下许多已得无碍解的无学比丘,却挑选了[仅]得无碍解而尚是有学的阿难。」[长老]为避开那他人的非议,[便想]:「没有阿难,法的结集是作不成的;我要正以诸比丘的认可来取他。」于是[自己]没有挑选[他]。

Yadi evaṃ sekkhopi samāno dhammasaṅgītiyā bahukārattā therena uccinitabbo assa, atha kasmā na uccinitoti? Parūpavādavivajjanato. Thero hi āyasmante ānande ativiya vissattho ahosi, tathā hi naṃ sirasmiṃ palitesu jātesupi ‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’ti, (saṃ. ni. 2.154) kumārakavādena ovadati. Sakyakulappasuto cāyasmā tathāgatassa bhātā cūḷapituputto. Tattha keci bhikkhū chandāgamanaṃ viya maññamānā – ‘‘bahū asekkhapaṭisambhidāppatte bhikkhū ṭhapetvā ānandaṃ sekkhapaṭisambhidāppattaṃ thero uccinī’’ti upavadeyyuṃ. Taṃ parūpavādaṃ parivajjento, ‘ānandaṃ vinā dhammasaṅgītiṃ na sakkā kātuṃ, bhikkhūnaṃyeva naṃ anumatiyā gahessāmī’ti na uccini.
已对照篇首

于是,诸比丘自己为阿难[之故]向长老请求了。正如[圣典]所说——

Atha sayameva bhikkhū ānandassatthāya theraṃ yāciṃsu. Yathāha –
缅 1.6已对照篇首

「诸比丘对具寿大迦叶这样说——『尊者,这位具寿阿难虽然是有学,[却]不可能因欲、因瞋、因痴、因怖畏而趣于非处,而且他在世尊座下已学得(pariyatta,[即]已修学)许多法与律;所以,尊者,请长老也挑选具寿阿难。』于是,具寿大迦叶也挑选了具寿阿难。」(《小品》437)

‘‘Bhikkhū āyasmantaṃ mahākassapaṃ etadavocuṃ – ‘ayaṃ, bhante, āyasmā ānando kiñcāpi sekkho abhabbo chandā dosā mohā bhayā agatiṃ gantuṃ, bahu cānena bhagavato santike dhammo ca vinayo ca pariyatto, tena hi, bhante, thero āyasmantampi ānandaṃ uccinatū’ti. Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo āyasmantampi ānandaṃ uccinī’’ti (cūḷava. 437).
已对照篇首

如是,连同那位由诸比丘的认可而被挑选的尊者,[共]成五百位长老。

Evaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ anumatiyā uccinitena tenāyasmatā saddhiṃ pañcatherasatāni ahesuṃ.
已对照篇首

于是,诸长老比丘心中生起了这[念]——「我们究竟应在何处结集法与律呢?」诸长老比丘心中[又]生起了这[念]——「王舍城乞食处(gocara)广大、卧坐处众多;我们何不在王舍城住雨安居而结集法与律,[并]不让其他比丘在王舍城入雨安居呢?」(《小品》437)

Atha kho therānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ etadahosi – ‘‘kattha nu kho mayaṃ dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyeyyāmā’’ti? Atha kho therānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ etadahosi – ‘‘rājagahaṃ kho mahāgocaraṃ pahūtasenāsanaṃ, yaṃnūna mayaṃ rājagahe vassaṃ vasantā dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyeyyāma, na aññe bhikkhū rājagahe vassaṃ upagaccheyyu’’nti (cūḷava. 437).
已对照篇首

那么,他们为何生起了那[念]呢?——[因为想到:]「这是我们的坚牢之业(thāvarakamma);[万一]有某个异分之人(visabhāgapuggala,[即]如须跋陀那样的人)进入僧团之中而把它翻覆(ukkoṭeyya)掉[便不好了]。」于是具寿大迦叶以白二羯磨之业白告——

Kasmā pana nesaṃ etadahosi? ‘‘Idaṃ pana amhākaṃ thāvarakammaṃ, koci visabhāgapuggalo saṅghamajjhaṃ pavisitvā ukkoṭeyyā’’ti. Athāyasmā mahākassapo ñattidutiyena kammena sāvesi –
已对照篇首

「贤友们,请僧团听我说:若僧团时机已至,愿僧团认可这五百位比丘在王舍城住雨安居而结集法与律,[并]不让其他比丘在王舍城住雨安居。」此是白(ñatti)。

‘‘Suṇātu me, āvuso saṅgho, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ saṅgho imāni pañca bhikkhusatāni sammanneyya rājagahe vassaṃ vasantāni dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyituṃ, na aññehi bhikkhūhi rājagahe vassaṃ vasitabba’’nti. Esā ñatti.
PTS 1.6已对照篇首

「贤友们,请僧团听我说:僧团认可这五百位比丘在王舍城住雨安居而结集法与律,[并]不让其他比丘在王舍城住雨安居。凡忍可这五百位比丘的认可——[即认可他们]在王舍城住雨安居而结集法与律,[并]不让其他比丘在王舍城住雨安居——的尊者,他便沉默;凡不忍可者,他便说出来。」

‘‘Suṇātu me, āvuso saṅgho, saṅgho imāni pañcabhikkhusatāni sammanna’’ti ‘rājagahe vassaṃ vasantāni dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyituṃ, na aññehi bhikkhūhi rājagahe vassaṃ vasitabbanti. Yassāyasmato khamati imesaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ sammuti’ rājagahe vassaṃ vasantānaṃ dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyituṃ, na aññehi bhikkhūhi rājagahe vassaṃ vasitabbanti, so tuṇhassa; yassa nakkhamati, so bhāseyya.
已对照篇首

「这五百位比丘已为僧团所认可——[即]在王舍城住雨安居而结集法与律,[并]不让其他比丘在王舍城住雨安居。僧团忍可,所以[僧团]沉默;我如是持此[事]。」(《小品》438)

‘‘Sammatāni saṅghena imāni pañcabhikkhusatāni rājagahe vassaṃ vasantāni dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyituṃ, na aññehi bhikkhūhi rājagahe vassaṃ vasitabbanti, khamati saṅghassa, tasmā tuṇhī, evametaṃ dhārayāmī’’ti (cūḷava. 438).
缅 1.7已对照篇首

而这羯磨语(kammavācā)是在如来般涅槃后的第二十一日所作的。因为世尊是在毗舍佉(visākha)满月日的黎明时分般涅槃的,此后[人们]以香、花鬘等供养了他那金色之身七日;如是[这]七日便名为善庆之戏(sādhukīḷana)之日。此后七日[遗体]在柴堆上为火所燃;[又]七日作了矛栏(sattipañjara),在议事堂(sandhāgārasālā)中作了舍利供养——如是过去了二十一日。正是在揭他母拉月(jeṭṭhamūla)白分第五日,[人们]分配了诸舍利。就在这分舍利之日,向那已集会的大比丘僧团告白了年老出家者须跋陀所作的非行(anācāra),并正以前述的方式挑选了诸比丘,[于是]作了这羯磨语。

Ayaṃ pana kammavācā tathāgatassa parinibbānato ekavīsatime divase katā. Bhagavā hi visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ paccūsasamaye parinibbuto, athassa sattāhaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ sarīraṃ gandhamālādīhi pūjayiṃsu. Evaṃ sattāhaṃ sādhukīḷanadivasā nāma ahesuṃ. Tato sattāhaṃ citakāya agginā jhāyi, sattāhaṃ sattipañjaraṃ katvā sandhāgārasālāyaṃ dhātupūjaṃ kariṃsūti, ekavīsati divasā gatā. Jeṭṭhamūlasukkapakkhapañcamiyaṃyeva dhātuyo bhājayiṃsu. Etasmiṃ dhātubhājanadivase sannipatitassa mahābhikkhusaṅghassa subhaddena vuḍḍhapabbajitena kataṃ anācāraṃ ārocetvā vuttanayeneva ca bhikkhū uccinitvā ayaṃ kammavācā katā.
已对照篇首

而作了这羯磨语之后,长老告诸比丘——「贤友们,如今已为你们作了四十日的机会;此后便不得说『我有名为某某的障碍(palibodha)』。所以在这期间,凡有病的障碍、或阿阇梨与戒师的障碍、或父母的障碍,或有钵要熏炙、衣要作的,[他]便断了那障碍而作那应作之事。」

Imañca pana kammavācaṃ katvā thero bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘āvuso, idāni tumhākaṃ cattālīsa divasā okāso kato, tato paraṃ ‘ayaṃ nāma no palibodho atthī’ti, vattuṃ na labbhā, tasmā etthantare yassa rogapalibodho vā ācariyupajjhāyapalibodho vā mātāpitupalibodho vā atthi, pattaṃ vā pana pacitabbaṃ, cīvaraṃ vā kātabbaṃ, so taṃ palibodhaṃ chinditvā taṃ karaṇīyaṃ karotū’’ti.
已对照篇首

而长老这样说了之后,便为自己五百[人]之众所围绕,前往王舍城。其余诸大长老也各自带了自己的随众,想要安慰为愁箭所刺中(sokasallasamappita)的大众,[便]向各方而去了。而富楼那长老带着七百比丘的随众,[心想]「我要安慰那来到如来般涅槃之处的大众」,便正留在拘尸那罗。

Evañca pana vatvā thero attano pañcasatāya parisāya parivuto rājagahaṃ gato. Aññepi mahātherā attano attano parivāre gahetvā sokasallasamappitaṃ mahājanaṃ assāsetukāmā taṃ taṃ disaṃ pakkantā. Puṇṇatthero pana sattasatabhikkhuparivāro ‘tathāgatassa parinibbānaṭṭhānaṃ āgatāgataṃ mahājanaṃ assāsessāmī’ti kusinārāyaṃyeva aṭṭhāsi.
PTS 1.7缅 1.8已对照篇首

具寿阿难正如从前[世尊]未般涅槃时[那样],[世尊]般涅槃之后也一样亲自取了世尊的钵与衣,与五百位比丘一同向舍卫城游行而去。而在他一路行去时,随从的诸比丘超越了计数之路。因此这位尊者所到之处,都有大悲叹。而长老渐次到达舍卫城时,舍卫城的居民们听说「长老来了」,便手持香、花鬘等前来迎接,说着「尊者阿难,从前您与世尊一同前来,今日您把世尊安置在何处而[独自]来了呢」等[语]而哭泣。[那时]有大悲叹,就如佛陀世尊般涅槃之日一般。

Āyasmā ānando yathā pubbe aparinibbutassa, evaṃ parinibbutassāpi bhagavato sayameva pattacīvaramādāya pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ yena sāvatthi tena cārikaṃ pakkāmi. Gacchato gacchato panassa parivārā bhikkhū gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā. Tenāyasmatā gatagataṭṭhāne mahāparidevo ahosi. Anupubbena pana sāvatthimanuppatte there sāvatthivāsino manussā ‘‘thero kira āgato’’ti sutvā gandhamālādihatthā paccuggantvā – ‘‘bhante, ānanda, pubbe bhagavatā saddhiṃ āgacchatha, ajja kuhiṃ bhagavantaṃ ṭhapetvā āgatatthā’’tiādīni vadamānā parodiṃsu. Buddhassa bhagavato parinibbānadivase viya mahāparidevo ahosi.
已对照篇首

于此,具寿阿难以与无常等相应的法语(dhammī kathā)使那大众了解[之后],进入祇树林,礼敬了十力[者]曾住的香室,开了门,把床座搬出来拍打,扫了香室,抛掉枯萎的花鬘与垃圾,[再]把床座搬进来、仍安放于原处,作了世尊在世时所应作的一切义务。而在作[这些]时,于浴室的清扫、备水等诸时节,[他]都礼敬香室——[因为它是]受用塔(paribhogacetiya)——并以「世尊,这不正是您沐浴的时候吗,这是[您]说法的时候,这是[您]给诸比丘教诫的时候,这是[您]作狮子卧的时候,这是[您]洗面的时候」等方式,正悲叹着而作;就如任何一个具上述性质者[所会那样]——[即]由于味知世尊功德之聚的甘露而爱敬确立、又尚未漏尽(akhīṇāsava)、并在无数十万生中由彼此相助而生起了心之柔软者[那样]。于是有某位天神使他生起悚惧——「尊者阿难,您这样悲叹,[又]怎能安慰他人呢?」他因那[天神]之语而心生悚惧,[便]自持而立;为调养那自如来般涅槃以来因多站多坐而致诸界过盛(ussannadhātuka,[即]病素积集)的身体,[他]在第二日饮了乳泻药(khīravirecana)而正坐在精舍中。就此,[他]对须婆青年所派来的青年说了这[语]——

Tatra sudaṃ āyasmā ānando aniccatādipaṭisaṃyuttāya dhammiyākathāya taṃ mahājanaṃ saññāpetvā jetavanaṃ pavisitvā dasabalena vasitagandhakuṭiṃ vanditvā dvāraṃ vivaritvā mañcapīṭhaṃ nīharitvā papphoṭetvā gandhakuṭiṃ sammajjitvā milātamālākacavaraṃ chaḍḍetvā mañcapīṭhaṃ atiharitvā puna yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā bhagavato ṭhitakāle karaṇīyaṃ vattaṃ sabbamakāsi. Kurumāno ca nhānakoṭṭhakasammajjanaudakupaṭṭhāpanādikālesu gandhakuṭiṃ vanditvā – ‘‘nanu bhagavā, ayaṃ tumhākaṃ nhānakālo, ayaṃ dhammadesanākālo, ayaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ovādadānakālo, ayaṃ sīhaseyyakappanakālo, ayaṃ mukhadhovanakālo’’tiādinā nayena paridevamānova akāsi, yathā taṃ bhagavato guṇagaṇāmatarasaññutāya patiṭṭhitapemo ceva akhīṇāsavo ca anekesu ca jātisatasahassesu aññamaññassūpakārasañjanitacittamaddavo. Tamenaṃ aññatarā devatā – ‘‘bhante, ānanda, tumhe evaṃ paridevamānā kathaṃ aññe assāsessathā’’ti saṃvejesi. So tassā vacanena saṃviggahadayo santhambhitvā tathāgatassa parinibbānato pabhuti ṭhānanisajjabahulattā ussannadhātukaṃ kāyaṃ samassāsetuṃ dutiyadivase khīravirecanaṃ pivitvā vihāreyeva nisīdi. Yaṃ sandhāya subhena māṇavena pahitaṃ māṇavakaṃ etadavoca –
已对照篇首

「青年,现在不是时候。我今天服了少量的药。取时与机[而定],或许明天我们也会前往。」(《长部》1.447)

‘‘Akālo, kho māṇavaka, atthi me ajja bhesajjamattā pītā, appeva nāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāmā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.447).
已对照篇首

[他]在第二日以彻迦长老(Cetaka)为随从沙门而前往,为须婆青年所问,便宣说了这《长部》中名为《须婆经》的第十部经。

Dutiyadivase cetakattherena pacchāsamaṇena gantvā subhena māṇavena puṭṭho imasmiṃ dīghanikāye subhasuttaṃ nāma dasamaṃ suttaṃ abhāsi.
PTS 1.8缅 1.9已对照篇首

此后,阿难长老在祇树林大寺令[人]作了破损残缺的修补,在雨安居的入期(vassūpanāyikā)临近时,舍下比丘僧团而前往王舍城;其余诸结集法者比丘也是这样。因为[他们]正是这样前往的,[圣典]便就他们而说了这[语]——「于是,诸长老比丘为结集法与律而前往王舍城。」(《小品》438)他们在阿沙荼(āsāḷhī)满月日行了布萨,于初一日集会而入了雨安居。

Atha ānandatthero jetavanamahāvihāre khaṇḍaphullappaṭisaṅkharaṇaṃ kārāpetvā upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya bhikkhusaṅghaṃ ohāya rājagahaṃ gato tathā aññepi dhammasaṅgāhakā bhikkhūti. Evañhi gate, te sandhāya ca idaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho therā bhikkhū rājagahaṃ agamaṃsu, dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyitu’’nti (cūḷava. 438). Te āsaḷhīpuṇṇamāyaṃ uposathaṃ katvā pāṭipadadivase sannipatitvā vassaṃ upagacchiṃsu.
已对照篇首

而在那时,环绕王舍城有十八座大寺,它们全都成了被弃置、倾颓、污秽的[样子]。因为在世尊般涅槃时,一切比丘都各自取了自己的钵与衣,弃下诸精舍与诸院落(pariveṇa)而去了。在那里作共住规约(katikavatta)的诸长老,为供敬世尊之语、又为免脱外道之论,[便]心想:「我们第一个月先作破损残缺的修补。」因为诸外道可能会这样说——「沙门乔达摩的弟子们,正当导师在世时[才]照料诸精舍,[导师]般涅槃了便弃置[不顾];诸家族的大财遍舍就要毁坏了。」所说的意思是:[诸长老]是为了免脱他们的[这种]论说而如是心想的。而这样心想之后,[他们]便作了共住规约。就此而说了——

Tena kho pana samayena rājagahaṃ parivāretvā aṭṭhārasa mahāvihārā honti, te sabbepi chaḍḍitapatitauklāpā ahesuṃ. Bhagavato hi parinibbāne sabbepi bhikkhū attano attano pattacīvaramādāya vihāre ca pariveṇe ca chaḍḍetvā agamaṃsu. Tattha katikavattaṃ kurumānā therā bhagavato vacanapūjanatthaṃ titthiyavādaparimocanatthañca – ‘paṭhamaṃ māsaṃ khaṇḍaphullappaṭisaṅkharaṇaṃ karomā’ti cintesuṃ. Titthiyā hi evaṃ vadeyyuṃ – ‘‘samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakā satthari ṭhiteyeva vihāre paṭijaggiṃsu, parinibbute chaḍḍesuṃ, kulānaṃ mahādhanapariccāgo vinassatī’’ti. Tesañca vādaparimocanatthaṃ cintesunti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ cintayitvā ca pana katikavattaṃ kariṃsu. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
已对照篇首

「于是,诸长老比丘生起了这样的[念头]——『贤友们,世尊曾称赞破损残缺的修补;来吧,贤友们,我们第一个月作破损残缺的修补,中间的一个月会集而结集法与律。』」(《小品》438)

‘‘Atha kho therānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ etadahosi – bhagavatā, kho āvuso, khaṇḍaphullappaṭisaṅkharaṇaṃ vaṇṇitaṃ, handa mayaṃ, āvuso, paṭhamaṃ māsaṃ khaṇḍaphullappaṭisaṅkharaṇaṃ karoma, majjhimaṃ māsaṃ sannipatitvā dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyissāmā’’ti (cūḷava. 438).
PTS 1.9缅 1.10已对照篇首

他们第二天去了,站在王门口。国王来了,礼敬之后问[有无]自己所应作之事——「尊者们,[你们]来是为何事?」诸长老为十八座大寺(mahāvihāra)的修缮而告知[须有]手工之劳(hatthakamma)。国王给了作手工之劳的人。诸长老在第一个月令人把一切寺院都修缮完毕,便禀告国王——「大王,寺院的修缮已完成,如今我们要作法与律的结集了。」「善哉,尊者们,请安心地作。愿威令之轮(āṇācakka)属于我,而法轮属于你们。尊者们,请吩咐,我该作什么?」「大王,[请备]作结集的诸比丘的集坐之处。」「尊者,我该在何处作呢?」「大王,宜在韦跋拉山(Vebhāra)侧、七叶窟(Sattapaṇṇiguhā)门前作。」「善哉,尊者。」阿阇世王[如此应诺],便令人建造了一座棚(maṇḍapa)——[它]如毗首羯磨(Vissakamma)所造一般,墙壁、柱与阶梯善加分布,以种种花饰之作与藤饰之作而斑斓,仿佛压过王宫的繁盛,仿佛嘲笑天宫的吉祥,犹如吉祥的住处,又犹如天与人的眼之飞鸟们唯一降落的渡口,犹如把世间的可乐[之物]聚集于一处、应见的精髓之精粹;[他又]以垂挂着种种花鬘、[华彩]流泻而下的美妙天篷,又以仿佛以种种宝而斑斓的摩尼铺砌之地面一般、以种种花的供献而斑斓且极为完善的地面之作,把它庄严得如梵天宫一般;在那大棚中为五百比丘铺设了五百件无价的许可敷具(kappiyapaccattharaṇa),依着南侧铺设了面向北的长老之座,在棚中央铺设了面向东、堪作佛世尊之座的法座,又于此处放置了镶嵌象牙的扇,然后令人告知比丘僧团——「尊者们,我的事已完成。」

Te dutiyadivase gantvā rājadvāre aṭṭhaṃsu. Rājā āgantvā vanditvā – ‘‘kiṃ bhante, āgatatthā’’ti attanā kattabbakiccaṃ pucchi. Therā aṭṭhārasa mahāvihārapaṭisaṅkharaṇatthāya hatthakammaṃ paṭivedesuṃ. Rājā hatthakammakārake manusse adāsi. Therā paṭhamaṃ māsaṃ sabbavihāre paṭisaṅkharāpetvā rañño ārocesuṃ – ‘‘niṭṭhitaṃ, mahārāja, vihārapaṭisaṅkharaṇaṃ, idāni dhammavinayasaṅgahaṃ karomā’’ti. ‘‘Sādhu bhante visaṭṭhā karotha, mayhaṃ āṇācakkaṃ, tumhākañca dhammacakkaṃ hotu, āṇāpetha, bhante, kiṃ karomī’’ti. ‘‘Saṅgahaṃ karontānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sannisajjaṭṭhānaṃ mahārājā’’ti. ‘‘Kattha karomi, bhante’’ti? ‘‘Vebhārapabbatapasse sattapaṇṇi guhādvāre kātuṃ yuttaṃ mahārājā’’ti. ‘‘Sādhu, bhante’’ti kho rājā ajātasattu vissakammunā nimmitasadisaṃ suvibhattabhittithambhasopānaṃ, nānāvidhamālākammalatākammavicittaṃ, abhibhavantamiva rājabhavanavibhūtiṃ, avahasantamiva devavimānasiriṃ, siriyā niketanamiva ekanipātatitthamiva ca devamanussanayanavihaṃgānaṃ, lokarāmaṇeyyakamiva sampiṇḍitaṃ daṭṭhabbasāramaṇḍaṃ maṇḍapaṃ kārāpetvā vividhakusumadāmolambakaviniggalantacāruvitānaṃ nānāratanavicittamaṇikoṭṭimatalamiva ca, naṃ nānāpupphūpahāravicittasupariniṭṭhitabhūmikammaṃ brahmavimānasadisaṃ alaṅkaritvā, tasmiṃ mahāmaṇḍape pañcasatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ anagghāni pañca kappiyapaccattharaṇasatāni paññapetvā, dakkhiṇabhāgaṃ nissāya uttarābhimukhaṃ therāsanaṃ, maṇḍapamajjhe puratthābhimukhaṃ buddhassa bhagavato āsanārahaṃ dhammāsanaṃ paññapetvā, dantakhacitaṃ bījaniñcettha ṭhapetvā, bhikkhusaṅghassa ārocāpesi – ‘‘niṭṭhitaṃ, bhante, mama kicca’’nti.
已对照篇首

而就在那一天,有些比丘针对具寿阿难这样说——「在这比丘僧团中,有一位比丘散发着腥气(vissagandha)而游行。」长老听了那[话,心想:]在这比丘僧团中并没有别的散发腥气而游行的比丘;「他们说的一定是就我而言」,[于是]生起了悚惧。还有些人竟就这样对他说——「阿难贤友,明天集会;而你是有学、尚有应作之事的[人],因此你不宜去参加集会,[你]要不放逸。」

Tasmiñca pana divase ekacce bhikkhū āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ sandhāya evamāhaṃsu – ‘‘imasmiṃ bhikkhusaṅghe eko bhikkhu vissagandhaṃ vāyanto vicaratī’’ti. Thero taṃ sutvā imasmiṃ bhikkhusaṅghe añño vissagandhaṃ vāyanto vicaraṇakabhikkhu nāma natthi. Addhā ete maṃ sandhāya vadantīti saṃvegaṃ āpajji. Ekacce naṃ āhaṃsuyeva – ‘‘sve āvuso, ānanda, sannipāto, tvañca sekkho sakaraṇīyo, tena te na yuttaṃ sannipātaṃ gantuṃ, appamatto hohī’’ti.
PTS 1.10缅 1.11已对照篇首

于是具寿阿难[想]:「明天集会;我身为有学而去参加集会,这对我实不适宜」,便以身至念度过了夜里的大半;在夜的破晓时分从经行[道]下来,进入住处,[想]「我要躺下了」而倾下身来——两足已离地,而头尚未及枕,就在这中间,[他的]心由不执取而从诸漏解脱。原来这位具寿在外以经行度过[长夜],未能生起殊胜[之证],便思量——「世尊不是曾对我说过这[话]吗——『阿难,你已作福,努力精勤吧,你很快就会成为无漏者。』(《长部》2.207)而诸佛[之语]并无语过;只是我的精进过度发勤,因此我的心转向掉举。来吧,我要调匀精进。」于是从经行[道]下来,站在洗足之处洗了足,进入住处,坐在小床上,[想]「我要稍事休息」,便把身体倾靠在小床上。两足已离地,头尚未及枕,就在这中间,[他的]心由不执取而从诸漏解脱——长老的阿罗汉[果]是离四威仪(catuiriyāpatha)的。因此,若有人问「在此教法中,不卧、不坐、不立、不经行而证得阿罗汉[果]的是哪位比丘?」,[便]该答「阿难长老」。

Atha kho āyasmā ānando – ‘sve sannipāto, na kho metaṃ patirūpaṃ yvāhaṃ sekkho samāno sannipātaṃ gaccheyya’nti, bahudeva rattiṃ kāyagatāya satiyā vītināmetvā rattiyā paccūsasamaye caṅkamā orohitvā vihāraṃ pavisitvā ‘‘nipajjissāmī’’ti kāyaṃ āvajjesi, dve pādā bhūmito muttā, apattañca sīsaṃ bimbohanaṃ, etasmiṃ antare anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimucci. Ayañhi āyasmā caṅkamena bahi vītināmetvā visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ asakkonto cintesi – ‘‘nanu maṃ bhagavā etadavoca – ‘katapuññosi tvaṃ, ānanda, padhānamanuyuñja, khippaṃ hohisi anāsavo’ti (dī. ni. 2.207). Buddhānañca kathādoso nāma natthi, mama pana accāraddhaṃ vīriyaṃ, tena me cittaṃ uddhaccāya saṃvattati. Handāhaṃ vīriyasamataṃ yojemī’’ti, caṅkamā orohitvā pādadhovanaṭṭhāne ṭhatvā pāde dhovitvā vihāraṃ pavisitvā mañcake nisīditvā, ‘‘thokaṃ vissamissāmī’’ti kāyaṃ mañcake apanāmesi. Dve pādā bhūmito muttā, sīsaṃ bimbohanamappattaṃ, etasmiṃ antare anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimuttaṃ, catuiriyāpathavirahitaṃ therassa arahattaṃ. Tena ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane anipanno anisinno aṭṭhito acaṅkamanto ko bhikkhu arahattaṃ patto’’ti vutte ‘‘ānandatthero’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
PTS 1.11已对照篇首

于是诸长老比丘在第二天、黑分第五日,饭食之事已作毕,收好衣钵,集会于法堂。这时具寿阿难已成阿罗汉,[方]前往集会。[他]是怎样去的呢?[他]心怀欢喜满意——「如今我配得进入集会之中了」——偏袒一肩,仿佛从蒂上脱落的多罗果(tālapakka),仿佛置于黄毛毯(paṇḍukambala)上的真生摩尼(jātimaṇi),仿佛于无云之空升起的满月,又仿佛因晨阳之触而开放、花蕊因花粉而赤黄的莲花——以清净、净白、有光、有吉祥的殊胜容颜,仿佛在宣告自己已证得阿罗汉[果]一般而去。于是具寿大迦叶见了他,生起这样的[念头]——「啊,证得阿罗汉[果]的阿难真是光耀!倘若导师尚在,今日一定会给阿难『善哉』;来吧,如今就由我来给与导师本应给与的『善哉』。」便三度给与了「善哉」。

Atha therā bhikkhū dutiyadivase pañcamiyaṃ kāḷapakkhassa katabhattakiccā pattacīvaraṃ paṭisāmetvā dhammasabhāyaṃ sannipatiṃsu. Atha kho āyasmā ānando arahā samāno sannipātaṃ agamāsi. Kathaṃ agamāsi? ‘‘Idānimhi sannipātamajjhaṃ pavisanāraho’’ti haṭṭhatuṭṭhacitto ekaṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ katvā bandhanā muttatālapakkaṃ viya, paṇḍukambale nikkhittajātimaṇi viya, vigatavalāhake nabhe samuggatapuṇṇacando viya, bālātapasamphassavikasitareṇupiñjaragabbhaṃ padumaṃ viya ca, parisuddhena pariyodātena sappabhena sassirīkena ca mukhavarena attano arahattappattiṃ ārocayamāno viya agamāsi. Atha naṃ disvā āyasmato mahākassapassa etadahosi – ‘‘sobhati vata bho arahattappatto ānando, sace satthā dhareyya, addhā ajjānandassa sādhukāraṃ dadeyya, handa, dānissāhaṃ satthārā dātabbaṃ sādhukāraṃ dadāmī’’ti, tikkhattuṃ sādhukāramadāsi.
已对照篇首

而中部诵者们则说——「阿难长老想让[人]知道自己已证得阿罗汉[果],[便]没有与诸比丘一同前来;诸比丘依长幼次第各自坐上自己所得之座,留出阿难长老的座位而坐。那时有些[人]这样说——『这座位是谁的?』『阿难的。』『可是阿难去了何处?』就在那时,长老思量——『如今是我该去的时候了。』于是[他]为显示自己的威力(ānubhāva),潜入地中,就在自己的座上现出了自身。」也有[人]说[他]是乘空而去而坐的。无论如此[或]如彼[都可]。总之,见了那[情形]而具寿大迦叶给与「善哉」,正是应当的。

Majjhimabhāṇakā pana vadanti – ‘‘ānandatthero attano arahattappattiṃ ñāpetukāmo bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ nāgato, bhikkhū yathāvuḍḍhaṃ attano attano pattāsane nisīdantā ānandattherassa āsanaṃ ṭhapetvā nisinnā. Tattha keci evamāhaṃsu – ‘etaṃ āsanaṃ kassā’ti? ‘Ānandassā’ti. ‘Ānando pana kuhiṃ gato’ti? Tasmiṃ samaye thero cintesi – ‘idāni mayhaṃ gamanakālo’ti. Tato attano ānubhāvaṃ dassento pathaviyaṃ nimujjitvā attano āsaneyeva attānaṃ dassesī’’ti, ākāsena gantvā nisīdītipi eke. Yathā vā tathā vā hotu. Sabbathāpi taṃ disvā āyasmato mahākassapassa sādhukāradānaṃ yuttameva.
缅 1.12已对照篇首

而在那位具寿这样到来之后,大迦叶长老告诸比丘——「贤友们,我们先结集什么?法呢,还是律?」诸比丘说——「尊者大迦叶,律乃佛教(buddhasāsana)之寿命。律住立时,教法便名为住立。所以我们先结集律。」「以谁为担(dhura)呢?」「具寿优波离。」「难道阿难不能[任]吗?」「不,并非不能。然而正等正觉者在世时,便依律的教理(vinayapariyatti)把具寿优波离立于最上[之位]——『诸比丘,我的比丘弟子诸持律者之中,这是最上的,即:优波离。』(《增支部》1.228)所以我们要问优波离长老而结集律。」

Evaṃ āgate pana tasmiṃ āyasmante mahākassapatthero bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘āvuso, kiṃ paṭhamaṃ saṅgāyāma, dhammaṃ vā vinayaṃ vā’’ti? Bhikkhū āhaṃsu – ‘‘bhante, mahākassapa, vinayo nāma buddhasāsanassa āyu. Vinaye ṭhite sāsanaṃ ṭhitaṃ nāma hoti. Tasmā paṭhamaṃ vinayaṃ saṅgāyāmā’’ti. ‘‘Kaṃ dhuraṃ katvā’’ti? ‘‘Āyasmantaṃ upāli’’nti. ‘‘Kiṃ ānando nappahotī’’ti? ‘‘No nappahoti’’. Api ca kho pana sammāsambuddho dharamānoyeva vinayapariyattiṃ nissāya āyasmantaṃ upāliṃ etadagge ṭhapesi – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vinayadharānaṃ yadidaṃ upālī’’ti (a. ni. 1.228). ‘Tasmā upālittheraṃ pucchitvā vinayaṃ saṅgāyāmā’ti.
已对照篇首

于是长老为了询问律,自己就选任(sammannati)了自己;优波离长老也为了解答而选任了[自己]。此中,这是[其]圣典[之文]——那时,具寿大迦叶向僧团白告——

Tato thero vinayaṃ pucchanatthāya attanāva attānaṃ sammanni. Upālittheropi vissajjanatthāya sammanni. Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi – atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo saṅghaṃ ñāpesi –
已对照篇首

「贤友们,请僧团听我说:若僧团时机已至,

‘‘Suṇātu me, āvuso, saṅgho, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ,
已对照篇首

我想向优波离询问律。」

Ahaṃ upāliṃ vinayaṃ puccheyya’’nti.
已对照篇首

具寿优波离也向僧团白告——

Āyasmāpi upāli saṅghaṃ ñāpesi –
已对照篇首

「尊者们,请僧团听我说:若僧团时机已至,

‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ,
已对照篇首

我愿解答具寿大迦叶所问的律。」(《小品》439)

Ahaṃ āyasmatā mahākassapena vinayaṃ puṭṭho vissajjeyya’’nti. (cūḷava. 439);
PTS 1.12已对照篇首

如是选任了自己之后,具寿优波离从座而起,偏袒一肩,礼敬诸长老比丘,取过镶嵌象牙的扇子,坐上法座;于是大迦叶长老坐上长老之座,向具寿优波离询问律。「贤友优波离,第一条波罗夷是在何处制定的?」「尊者,在毘舍离(Vesālī)。」「是因谁[而制]?」「是因迦兰陀子须提那(Sudinna Kalandaputta)[而制]。」「是在什么事上?」「在淫欲法上。」

Evaṃ attānaṃ sammannitvā āyasmā upāli uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ katvā there bhikkhū vanditvā dhammāsane nisīdi dantakhacitaṃ bījaniṃ gahetvā, tato mahākassapatthero therāsane nisīditvā āyasmantaṃ upāliṃ vinayaṃ pucchi. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ āvuso, upāli, pārājikaṃ kattha paññatta’’nti? ‘‘Vesāliyaṃ, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Kaṃ ārabbhā’’ti? ‘‘Sudinnaṃ kalandaputtaṃ ārabbhā’’ti. ‘‘Kismiṃ vatthusmi’’nti? ‘‘Methunadhamme’’ti.
已对照篇首

「于是,具寿大迦叶向具寿优波离既询问了第一条波罗夷的事,也询问了因缘,也询问了人,也询问了制戒(paññatti),也询问了随制(anupaññatti),也询问了罪(āpatti),也询问了无罪(anāpatti)。」(《小品》439)凡所被问,具寿优波离便一一解答。

‘‘Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo āyasmantaṃ upāliṃ paṭhamassa pārājikassa vatthumpi pucchi, nidānampi pucchi, puggalampi pucchi, paññattimpi pucchi, anupaññattimpi pucchi, āpattimpi pucchi, anāpattimpi pucchi’’ (cūḷava. 439). Puṭṭho puṭṭho āyasmā upāli vissajjesi.
缅 1.13已对照篇首

[设难:]那么,在这第一条波罗夷[的圣典文句]中,有没有什么应除去的或应加入的呢?——[答:]没有应除去的。因为在佛世尊所说[之语]中,并没有所谓应除去的[东西]。因为诸如来连一个文字也不会无义地说。然而在诸弟子或诸天神所说[之语]中,则也有应除去的[东西],那[部分]结集法的诸长老便除去了。至于应加入的,则在一切处都有;所以凡在何处适合加入什么,他们便正在那里加入了。那么,那[应加入的]是什么呢?即「尔时」、或「而于尔时」、或「于是」、或「这样说时」、或「说了此[语]」等等,仅是这类连接之语而已。而如是加入了适合加入的[语]之后,[他们]便安立说:「这是第一条波罗夷。」第一条波罗夷被编入结集之后,五百位阿罗汉便依所编入结集的方式而作合诵——「尔时,佛世尊住在毗兰若(Verañjā)。」就在他们开始诵习之时,大地便如同发出善哉之声一般,以水为边际而震动了。

Kiṃ panettha paṭhamapārājike kiñci apanetabbaṃ vā pakkhipitabbaṃ vā atthi natthīti? Apanetabbaṃ natthi. Buddhassa hi bhagavato bhāsite apanetabbaṃ nāma natthi. Na hi tathāgatā ekabyañjanampi niratthakaṃ vadanti. Sāvakānaṃ pana devatānaṃ vā bhāsite apanetabbampi hoti, taṃ dhammasaṅgāhakattherā apanayiṃsu. Pakkhipitabbaṃ pana sabbatthāpi atthi, tasmā yaṃ yattha pakkhipituṃ yuttaṃ, taṃ pakkhipiṃsuyeva. Kiṃ pana tanti? ‘Tena samayenā’ti vā, ‘tena kho pana samayenā’ti vā, ‘atha khoti vā’, ‘evaṃ vutteti’ vā, ‘etadavocā’ti vā, evamādikaṃ sambandhavacanamattaṃ. Evaṃ pakkhipitabbayuttaṃ pakkhipitvā pana – ‘‘idaṃ paṭhamapārājika’’nti ṭhapesuṃ. Paṭhamapārājike saṅgahamārūḷhe pañca arahantasatāni saṅgahaṃ āropitanayeneva gaṇasajjhāyamakaṃsu – ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā verañjāyaṃ viharatī’’ti. Tesaṃ sajjhāyāraddhakāleyeva sādhukāraṃ dadamānā viya mahāpathavī udakapariyantaṃ katvā akampittha.
PTS 1.13已对照篇首

以这同一方式把其余三条波罗夷编入结集之后,[他们]安立说:「这是〈波罗夷篇〉。」把十三条僧残安立为「十三法(terasaka)」;把两条学处安立为「不定法(aniyata)」;把三十条学处安立为「尼萨耆波逸提(nissaggiya pācittiya)」;把九十二条学处安立为「波逸提」;把四条学处安立为「波罗提提舍尼(pāṭidesanīya)」;把七十五条学处安立为「众学法(sekhiya)」;把七种法安立为「灭诤(adhikaraṇasamatha)」。如是,把[共]二百二十七条学处称为「大分别」而安立了。在《大分别》末尾,大地也依先前的方式而震动了。

Eteneva nayena sesāni tīṇi pārājikāni saṅgahaṃ āropetvā ‘‘idaṃ pārājikakaṇḍa’’nti ṭhapesuṃ. Terasa saṅghādisesāni ‘‘terasaka’’nti ṭhapesuṃ. Dve sikkhāpadāni ‘‘aniyatānī’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Tiṃsa sikkhāpadāni ‘‘nissaggiyāni pācittiyānī’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Dvenavuti sikkhāpadāni ‘‘pācittiyānī’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Cattāri sikkhāpadāni ‘‘pāṭidesanīyānī’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Pañcasattati sikkhāpadāni ‘‘sekhiyānī’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Satta dhamme ‘‘adhikaraṇasamathā’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Evaṃ sattavīsādhikāni dve sikkhāpadasatāni ‘‘mahāvibhaṅgo’’ti kittetvā ṭhapesuṃ. Mahāvibhaṅgāvasānepi purimanayeneva mahāpathavī akampittha.
已对照篇首

接着,在〈比丘尼分别〉中把八条学处安立为「这名为〈波罗夷篇〉」;把十七条学处安立为「十七法(sattarasaka)」;把三十条学处安立为「尼萨耆波逸提」;把一百六十六条学处安立为「波逸提」;把八条学处安立为「波罗提提舍尼」;把七十五条学处安立为「众学法」;把七种法安立为「灭诤」。如是,把三百零四条学处称为「比丘尼分别」,[并]安立说:「这名为〈二部分别〉,[共]六十四诵分。」在《二部分别》末尾,也依所说的方式而有大地震动。

Tato bhikkhunīvibhaṅge aṭṭha sikkhāpadāni ‘‘pārājikakaṇḍaṃ nāma ida’’nti ṭhapesuṃ. Sattarasa sikkhāpadāni ‘‘sattarasaka’’nti ṭhapesuṃ. Tiṃsa sikkhāpadāni ‘‘nissaggiyāni pācittiyānī’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Chasaṭṭhisatasikkhāpadāni ‘‘pācittiyānī’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Aṭṭha sikkhāpadāni ‘‘pāṭidesanīyānī’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Pañcasattati sikkhāpadāni ‘‘sekhiyānī’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Satta dhamme ‘‘adhikaraṇasamathā’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Evaṃ tīṇi sikkhāpadasatāni cattāri ca sikkhāpadāni ‘‘bhikkhunīvibhaṅgo’’ti kittetvā – ‘‘ayaṃ ubhato vibhaṅgo nāma catusaṭṭhibhāṇavāro’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Ubhatovibhaṅgāvasānepi vuttanayeneva mahāpathavikampo ahosi.
缅 1.14已对照篇首

以这同一方法把[篇幅]量为八十诵分的《犍度》与量为二十五诵分的《附随》编入结集之后,[他们]安立说:「这名为律藏。」在律藏末尾,也依所说的方式而有大地震动。[他们]把它交付具寿优波离——「贤友,请把这[律藏]教你的诸依止弟子诵习。」在律藏的结集完毕时,优波离长老放下镶嵌象牙的扇子,从法座下来,礼敬诸长老比丘,便坐在自己所得之座上。

Etenevupāyena asītibhāṇavāraparimāṇaṃ khandhakaṃ, pañcavīsatibhāṇavāraparimāṇaṃ parivārañca saṅgahaṃ āropetvā ‘‘idaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ nāmā’’ti ṭhapesuṃ. Vinayapiṭakāvasānepi vuttanayeneva mahāpathavikampo ahosi. Taṃ āyasmantaṃ upāliṃ paṭicchāpesuṃ – ‘‘āvuso, imaṃ tuyhaṃ nissitake vācehī’’ti. Vinayapiṭakasaṅgahāvasāne upālitthero dantakhacitaṃ bījaniṃ nikkhipitvā dhammāsanā orohitvā there bhikkhū vanditvā attano pattāsane nisīdi.
已对照篇首

结集了律之后,想要结集法的具寿大迦叶问诸比丘——「在结集法时,应以哪一个人为担当(dhura,[即]主导)而结集法呢?」诸比丘说——「以阿难长老为担当。」

Vinayaṃ saṅgāyitvā dhammaṃ saṅgāyitukāmo āyasmā mahākassapo bhikkhū pucchi – ‘‘dhammaṃ saṅgāyante hi kaṃ puggalaṃ dhuraṃ katvā dhammo saṅgāyitabbo’’ti? Bhikkhū – ‘‘ānandattheraṃ dhuraṃ katvā’’ti āhaṃsu.
已对照篇首

于是,具寿大迦叶向僧团白告——

Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo saṅghaṃ ñāpesi –
PTS 1.14已对照篇首

「贤友们,请僧团听我说:若僧团时机已至,

‘‘Suṇātu me, āvuso, saṅgho, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ,
已对照篇首

我想向阿难询问法。」

Ahaṃ ānandaṃ dhammaṃ puccheyya’’nti;
已对照篇首

于是,具寿阿难向僧团白告——

Atha kho āyasmā ānando saṅghaṃ ñāpesi –
已对照篇首

「尊者们,请僧团听我说:若僧团时机已至,

‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ,
已对照篇首

我愿解答具寿大迦叶所问的法。」

Ahaṃ āyasmatā mahākassapena dhammaṃ puṭṭho vissajjeyya’’nti;
已对照篇首

于是,具寿阿难从座而起,偏袒一肩,礼敬诸长老比丘,取过镶嵌象牙的扇子,坐上法座。于是,具寿大迦叶问诸比丘——「贤友们,我们先结集哪一藏?」「尊者,经藏。」「经藏中有四种结集(saṅgīti),其中先结集哪一种结集?」「尊者,长部结集。」「长部结集中有三十四部经、三品,其中先结集哪一品?」「尊者,〈戒蕴品〉。」「〈戒蕴品〉中有十三部经,其中先结集哪一部经?」「尊者,[有一部]名为《梵网经》[的]——[它]以三种戒庄严,摧毁诡诈、虚谈等种种邪命,解开六十二种见之网,震动一万世界;我们就先结集它。」

Atha kho āyasmā ānando uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ katvā there bhikkhū vanditvā dhammāsane nisīdi dantakhacitaṃ bījaniṃ gahetvā. Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo bhikkhū pucchi – ‘‘kataraṃ, āvuso, piṭakaṃ paṭhamaṃ saṅgāyāmā’’ti? ‘‘Suttantapiṭakaṃ, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Suttantapiṭake catasso saṅgītiyo, tāsu paṭhamaṃ kataraṃ saṅgīti’’nti? ‘‘Dīghasaṅgītiṃ, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Dīghasaṅgītiyaṃ catutiṃsa suttāni, tayo vaggā, tesu paṭhamaṃ kataraṃ vagga’’nti? ‘‘Sīlakkhandhavaggaṃ, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Sīlakkhandhavagge terasa suttantā, tesu paṭhamaṃ kataraṃ sutta’’nti? ‘‘Brahmajālasuttaṃ nāma bhante, tividhasīlālaṅkataṃ, nānāvidhamicchājīvakuha lapanādividdhaṃsanaṃ, dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhijālaviniveṭhanaṃ, dasasahassilokadhātukampanaṃ, taṃ paṭhamaṃ saṅgāyāmā’’ti.
缅 1.15已对照篇首

于是,具寿大迦叶对具寿阿难这样说——「贤友阿难,《梵网[经]》是在何处所说的?」「尊者,在王舍城与那烂陀之间,[即]庵婆罗提迦的王家客舍。」「是因谁[而说]?」「是因游方者善念(Suppiya)与青年梵授(Brahmadatta)。」「是在什么事上?」「在称赞与毁谤(vaṇṇāvaṇṇa)[之事]上。」于是,具寿大迦叶向具寿阿难既询问了《梵网经》的因缘,也询问了人,也询问了事(《小品》440)。具寿阿难便解答了。在解答完毕时,五百位阿罗汉作了合诵;也依所说的方式而有大地震动。

Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ etadavoca, ‘‘brahmajālaṃ, āvuso ānanda, kattha bhāsita’’nti? ‘‘Antarā ca, bhante, rājagahaṃ antarā ca nāḷandaṃ rājāgārake ambalaṭṭhikāya’’nti. ‘‘Kaṃ ārabbhā’’ti? ‘‘Suppiyañca paribbājakaṃ, brahmadattañca māṇava’’nti. ‘‘Kismiṃ vatthusmi’’nti? ‘‘Vaṇṇāvaṇṇe’’ti. Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ brahmajālassa nidānampi pucchi, puggalampi pucchi, vatthumpi pucchi (cūḷava. 440). Āyasmā ānando vissajjesi. Vissajjanāvasāne pañca arahantasatāni gaṇasajjhāyamakaṃsu. Vuttanayeneva ca pathavikampo ahosi.
已对照篇首

如是结集了《梵网[经]》之后,此后又以「贤友阿难,《沙门果[经]》又是在何处所说」等方式,依问答的次第,连同《梵网[经]》把全部十三部经都结集起来,[然后]称说「此名为《戒蕴品》」而加以安立。

Evaṃ brahmajālaṃ saṅgāyitvā tato paraṃ ‘‘sāmaññaphalaṃ, panāvuso ānanda, kattha bhāsita’’ntiādinā nayena pucchāvissajjanānukkamena saddhiṃ brahmajālena sabbepi terasa suttante saṅgāyitvā – ‘‘ayaṃ sīlakkhandhavaggo nāmā’’ti kittetvā ṭhapesuṃ.
PTS 1.15已对照篇首

接着是《大品》,接着是《波梨品》——如是把汇集为三品的、以三十四部经庄严的、[共]六十四诵分之量的圣典(tanti)结集之后,说「此名为《长部》」,[便]交付给具寿阿难:「贤友,此[部]你要为你的依止者们教诵。」

Tadanantaraṃ mahāvaggaṃ, tadanantaraṃ pāthikavagganti, evaṃ tivaggasaṅgahaṃ catutiṃsasuttapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ catusaṭṭhibhāṇavāraparimāṇaṃ tantiṃ saṅgāyitvā ‘‘ayaṃ dīghanikāyo nāmā’’ti vatvā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ paṭicchāpesuṃ – ‘‘āvuso, imaṃ tuyhaṃ nissitake vācehī’’ti.
已对照篇首

此后,结集了[共]八十诵分之量的《中部》,交付给法将舍利弗长老的依止者们:「此[部]你们要护持。」

Tato anantaraṃ asītibhāṇavāraparimāṇaṃ majjhimanikāyaṃ saṅgāyitvā dhammasenāpatisāriputtattherassa nissitake paṭicchāpesuṃ – ‘‘imaṃ tumhe pariharathā’’ti.
已对照篇首

此后,结集了[共]一百诵分之量的《相应部》,交付给大迦叶长老:「尊者,此[部]您要为您的依止者们教诵。」

Tato anantaraṃ satabhāṇavāraparimāṇaṃ saṃyuttanikāyaṃ saṅgāyitvā mahākassapattheraṃ paṭicchāpesuṃ – ‘‘bhante, imaṃ tumhākaṃ nissitake vācethā’’ti.
已对照篇首

此后,结集了[共]一百二十诵分之量的《增支部》,交付给阿那律长老:「此[部]您要为您的依止者们教诵。」

Tato anantaraṃ vīsatibhāṇavārasataparimāṇaṃ aṅguttaranikāyaṃ saṅgāyitvā anuruddhattheraṃ paṭicchāpesuṃ – ‘‘imaṃ tumhākaṃ nissitake vācethā’’ti.
已对照篇首

此后,《法集论》《分别论》《界论》《人施设论》《论事》《双论》《发趣论》[这些]被称为「论」。结集了如是所解说的、微细智所行境的圣典之后,说「此名为论藏」,五百位阿罗汉[便]作了诵习。依前说之法,[大]地震动了。

Tato anantaraṃ dhammasaṅgahavibhaṅgadhātukathāpuggalapaññattikathāvatthuyamakapaṭṭhānaṃ abhidhammoti vuccati. Evaṃ saṃvaṇṇitaṃ sukhumañāṇagocaraṃ tantiṃ saṅgāyitvā – ‘‘idaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ nāmā’’ti vatvā pañca arahantasatāni sajjhāyamakaṃsu. Vuttanayeneva pathavikampo ahosīti.
缅 1.16已对照篇首

长部诵者们说:此后,结集了《本生》《义释》《无碍解道》《譬喻》《经集》《小诵》《法句》《自说》《如是语》《天宫事》《饿鬼事》《长老偈》《长老尼偈》这部圣典之后,又说「此名为小部典籍(khuddakagantha)」,[便]把[它]编入了论藏之中。而中部诵者们则说:「连同《所行藏》《佛种姓》,这全部名为小部典籍者,都摄于经藏。」

Tato paraṃ jātakaṃ, niddeso, paṭisambhidāmaggo, apadānaṃ, suttanipāto, khuddakapāṭho, dhammapadaṃ, udānaṃ, itivuttakaṃ, vimānavatthu, petavatthu, theragāthā, therīgāthāti imaṃ tantiṃ saṅgāyitvā ‘‘khuddakagantho nāmāya’’nti ca vatvā ‘‘abhidhammapiṭakasmiṃyeva saṅgahaṃ āropayiṃsū’’ti dīghabhāṇakā vadanti. Majjhimabhāṇakā pana ‘‘cariyāpiṭakabuddhavaṃsehi saddhiṃ sabbampetaṃ khuddakaganthaṃ nāma suttantapiṭake pariyāpanna’’nti vadanti.
已对照篇首

如是,这全部佛语,依味为一种,依法与律为两种,依初、中、后为三种,依藏亦然;依部为五种,依分为九种,依法蕴为八万四千种——应如是了知。

Evametaṃ sabbampi buddhavacanaṃ rasavasena ekavidhaṃ, dhammavinayavasena duvidhaṃ, paṭhamamajjhimapacchimavasena tividhaṃ. Tathā piṭakavasena. Nikāyavasena pañcavidhaṃ, aṅgavasena navavidhaṃ, dhammakkhandhavasena caturāsītisahassavidhanti veditabbaṃ.
PTS 1.16已对照篇首

如何依味为一种?世尊现证无上正等正觉之后,直到以无余涅槃界般涅槃为止,于此中间四十五年中,或教诫诸天、人、龙、夜叉等、或[自]观察而说的一切,全都是一味,唯是解脱之味。如是依味为一种。

Kathaṃ rasavasena ekavidhaṃ? Yañhi bhagavatā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhitvā yāva anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati, etthantare pañcacattālīsavassāni devamanussanāgayakkhādayo anusāsantena vā paccavekkhantena vā vuttaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ ekarasaṃ vimuttirasameva hoti. Evaṃ rasavasena ekavidhaṃ.
已对照篇首

如何依法与律为两种?这一切都归入「法」与「律」之数。此中,律藏是律,其余的佛语是法。正因此[大迦叶]说:「我们何不结集法与律。」(《小品》437)又[说]:「我当问优波离律,问阿难法。」如是依法与律为两种。

Kathaṃ dhammavinayavasena duvidhaṃ? Sabbameva cetaṃ dhammo ceva vinayo cāti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Tattha vinayapiṭakaṃ vinayo, avasesaṃ buddhavacanaṃ dhammo. Tenevāha ‘‘yannūna mayaṃ dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyeyyāmā’’ti (cūḷava. 437). ‘‘Ahaṃ upāliṃ vinayaṃ puccheyyaṃ, ānandaṃ dhammaṃ puccheyya’’nti ca. Evaṃ dhammavinayavasena duvidhaṃ.
已对照篇首

如何依初、中、后为三种?这一切确实分为最初佛语、中间佛语、最后佛语三类。此中——

Kathaṃ paṭhamamajjhimapacchimavasena tividhaṃ? Sabbameva hidaṃ paṭhamabuddhavacanaṃ, majjhimabuddhavacanaṃ, pacchimabuddhavacananti tippabhedaṃ hoti. Tattha –
已对照篇首

「无数生的轮回中,我流转而不得[见],

‘‘Anekajātisaṃsāraṃ, sandhāvissaṃ anibbisaṃ;
已对照篇首

寻觅造屋者——一再受生是苦。

Gahakāraṃ gavesanto, dukkhā jāti punappunaṃ.
已对照篇首

造屋者啊,你已被见到!你不会再造屋了;

Gahakāraka diṭṭhosi, puna gehaṃ na kāhasi;
已对照篇首

你的一切椽木已折断,屋顶已毁坏;

Sabbā te phāsukā bhaggā, gahakūṭaṃ visaṅkhataṃ;
已对照篇首

心已至离行,已证得诸爱之尽。」(《法句》153、154)

Visaṅkhāragataṃ cittaṃ, taṇhānaṃ khayamajjhagā’’ti. (dha. pa. 153-54);
已对照篇首

此是最初佛语。有些[师]说《犍度》中「当诸法显现时」(《大品》1)这首自说偈[才是最初佛语]。然而应知:这首自说偈是在初一日(pāṭipadadivasa)、已证得一切知性者以喜悦所成之智观察缘之行相时所生起的。

Idaṃ paṭhamabuddhavacanaṃ. Keci ‘‘yadā have pātubhavanti dhammā’’ti (mahāva. 1) khandhake udānagāthaṃ vadanti. Esā pana pāṭipadadivase sabbaññubhāvappattassa somanassamayañāṇena paccayākāraṃ paccavekkhantassa uppannā udānagāthāti veditabbā.
缅 1.17已对照篇首

而在般涅槃时所说的——「那么,诸比丘,我现在告诉你们:诸行是坏灭法,当以不放逸成就。」(《长部》2.218)——此是最后佛语。于二者之间所说的,名为中间佛语。如是依最初、中间、最后佛语为三种。

Yaṃ pana parinibbānakāle abhāsi – ‘‘handa dāni, bhikkhave, āmantayāmi vo, vayadhammā saṅkhārā, appamādena sampādethā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.218) idaṃ pacchimabuddhavacanaṃ. Ubhinnamantare yaṃ vuttaṃ, etaṃ majjhimabuddhavacanaṃ nāma. Evaṃ paṭhamamajjhimapacchimabuddhavacanavasena tividhaṃ.
PTS 1.17已对照篇首

如何依藏为三种?这一切确实只分为律藏、经藏、论藏三类。此中,把第一次结集时已结集的与未结集的一切都汇总起来:两部波罗提木叉、《二部分别》、二十二《犍度》、十六《附随》——此名为律藏。以《梵网[经]》等三十四部经所汇集的是《长部》,以《根本法门经》等一百五十二部经所汇集的是《中部》,以《渡暴流经》等七千七百六十二部经所汇集的是《相应部》,以《心遍取经》等九千五百五十七部经所汇集的是《增支部》,依《小诵》《法句》《自说》《如是语》《经集》《天宫事》《饿鬼事》《长老偈》《长老尼偈》《本生》《义释》《无碍解道》《譬喻》《佛种姓》《所行藏》而分为十五分的是《小部》——此名为经藏。《法集论》《分别论》《界论》《人施设论》《论事》《双论》《发趣论》——此名为论藏。此中——

Kathaṃ piṭakavasena tividhaṃ? Sabbampi cetaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ suttantapiṭakaṃ abhidhammapiṭakanti tippabhedameva hoti. Tattha paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ saṅgītañca asaṅgītañca sabbampi samodhānetvā ubhayāni pātimokkhāni, dve vibhaṅgā, dvāvīsati khandhakā, soḷasaparivārāti – idaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ nāma. Brahmajālādicatuttiṃsasuttasaṅgaho dīghanikāyo, mūlapariyāyasuttādidiyaḍḍhasatadvesuttasaṅgaho majjhimanikāyo, oghataraṇasuttādisattasuttasahassasattasatadvāsaṭṭhisuttasaṅgaho saṃyuttanikāyo, cittapariyādānasuttādinavasuttasahassapañcasatasattapaññāsasuttasaṅgaho aṅguttaranikāyo, khuddakapāṭha-dhammapada-udāna-itivuttaka-suttanipāta-vimānavatthu-petavatthu-theragāthā-therīgāthā-jātaka-niddesa-paṭisambhidāmagga-apadāna-buddhavaṃsa-cariyāpiṭakavasena pannarasappabhedo khuddakanikāyoti idaṃ suttantapiṭakaṃ nāma. Dhammasaṅgaho, vibhaṅgo, dhātukathā, puggalapaññatti, kathāvatthu, yamakaṃ, paṭṭhānanti – idaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ nāma. Tattha –
已对照篇首

「由方法多样、方法殊胜,又由调伏身与语故;

‘‘Vividhavisesanayattā, vinayanato ceva kāyavācānaṃ;
已对照篇首

此[律]被通晓律义者宣说为『律』。」

Vinayatthavidūhi ayaṃ, vinayo vinayoti akkhāto’’.
已对照篇首

此中确有种种方法:五种波罗提木叉的诵出、以波罗夷为首的七犯聚之本母(mātikā)、《分别》等诸类别。又有殊胜的、以坚固作与松缓作为用途的随制(anupaññatti)之法[——此二依次是于世间之罪与制罪的诸学处中]。又此[律]由遮止身、语的违犯(ajjhācāra)而调伏身与语;所以,由方法多样、由方法殊胜,又由调伏身与语,[它]被宣说为「律」。因此,为[令人]善巧于此[律]的语义,[便]说了此[偈]——

Vividhā hi ettha pañcavidhapātimokkhuddesapārājikādi satta āpattikkhandhamātikā vibhaṅgādippabhedā nayā. Visesabhūtā ca daḷhīkammasithilakaraṇappayojanā anupaññattinayā. Kāyikavācasikaajjhācāranisedhanato cesa kāyaṃ vācañca vineti, tasmā vividhanayattā visesanayattā kāyavācānaṃ vinayanato ceva vinayoti akkhāto. Tenetametassa vacanatthakosallatthaṃ vuttaṃ –
已对照篇首

「由方法多样、方法殊胜,又由调伏身与语故;

‘‘Vividhavisesanayattā, vinayanato ceva kāyavācānaṃ;
已对照篇首

此[律]被通晓律义者宣说为『律』。」

Vinayatthavidūhi ayaṃ, vinayo vinayoti akkhāto’’ti.
缅 1.18已对照篇首

而另一[藏]则——

Itaraṃ pana –
已对照篇首

「由指示诸义故、由善说故、由出生故、由流出故,

‘‘Atthānaṃ sūcanato suvuttato, savanatotha sūdanato;
已对照篇首

由善护故、又由与线相似故,[此]被宣说为『经』。」

Suttāṇā suttasabhāgato ca, suttanti akkhātaṃ.
PTS 1.18已对照篇首

因为它指示自利、他利等差别之义。又此中诸义是善说的,因为是随顺所化者的意乐而说的。又它出生诸义,如庄稼[出生]果实——说的是「产生」[之义]。又它流出[诸义],如母牛[流出]乳——说的是「使流出」[之义]。又它善护它们——说的是「守护」[之义]。又它与线相似:正如线对诸木匠是准量,此[经]对诸智者亦然。又如以线所摄集的诸花不散落、不毁坏,同样,被它所摄集的诸义[亦然]。因此,为[令人]善巧于此[经]的语义,[便]说了此[偈]——

Tañhi attatthaparatthādibhede atthe sūceti. Suvuttā cettha atthā, veneyyajjhāsayānulomena vuttattā. Savati cetaṃ atthe sassamiva phalaṃ, pasavatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sūdati cetaṃ dhenu viya khīraṃ, paggharāpetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Suṭṭhu ca ne tāyati, rakkhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Suttasabhāgañcetaṃ, yathā hi tacchakānaṃ suttaṃ pamāṇaṃ hoti, evametampi viññūnaṃ. Yathā ca suttena saṅgahitāni pupphāni na vikirīyanti, na viddhaṃsīyanti, evameva tena saṅgahitā atthā. Tenetametassa vacanatthakosallatthaṃ vuttaṃ –
已对照篇首

「由指示诸义故、由善说故、由出生故、由流出故,

‘‘Atthānaṃ sūcanato, suvuttato savanatotha sūdanato;
已对照篇首

由善护故、又由与线相似故,[此]被宣说为『经』。」

Suttāṇā suttasabhāgato ca, suttanti akkhāta’’nti.
已对照篇首

而另一[者]则——

Itaro pana –
已对照篇首

「此中,凡[诸法是]具增长的、具[自]相的、受尊崇的、被限定的,

‘‘Yaṃ ettha vuḍḍhimanto, salakkhaṇā pūjitā paricchinnā;
已对照篇首

以及[如上]所说的与殊胜的诸法——由此[便]被宣说为『阿毗达摩』。」

Vuttādhikā ca dhammā, abhidhammo tena akkhāto’’.
已对照篇首

因为这 abhi 一语,可见于增长、[自]相、受尊崇、被限定、殊胜[诸义]中。正是如此,它在「我的诸苦受剧烈地增进,不退减」等[语]中(《中部》3.389)来于「增长」[义];在「凡那些被称知、被标志的诸夜」等[语]中(《中部》1.49)[来于]「具[自]相」[义];在「王中之王,人中之主」等[语]中(《中部》2.399)[来于]「受尊崇」[义];在「有能力于阿毗达摩、阿毗律中教导」等[语]中(《大品》85)[来于]「被限定」[义]——说的是「于彼此无混杂的法与律中」[之义]。在「以殊胜的容色」等[语]中(《天宫事》819)[来于]「殊胜」[义]。

Ayañhi abhisaddo vuḍḍhilakkhaṇapūjitaparicchinnādhikesu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘bāḷhā me dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti, no paṭikkamantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.389) vuḍḍhiyaṃ āgato. ‘‘Yā tā rattiyo abhiññātā abhilakkhitā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.49) salakkhaṇe. ‘‘Rājābhirājā manujindo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.399) pūjite. ‘‘Paṭibalo vinetuṃ abhidhamme abhivinaye’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 85) paricchinne. Aññamaññasaṅkaravirahite dhamme ca vinaye cāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Abhikkantena vaṇṇenā’’tiādīsu (vi. va. 819) adhike.
缅 1.19已对照篇首

而此中,依「为生起色[界]而修习道」(《法集论》251)、「以与慈俱的心遍满一方而住」等(《分别论》642)之法,也说了具增长的诸法。依「或以色为所缘,或以声为所缘」等(《法集论》1)之法,由于是以所缘等而应被标[相]的,[故]也是具[自]相的。依「有学诸法、无学诸法、出世间诸法」等(《法集论·三法本母》11、《法集论·二法本母》12)之法,也是受尊崇的——意趣是「应受供养」。依「有触,有受」等(《法集论》1)之法,由于以自性而被限定,[故]也是被限定的。依「大诸法(mahaggatā dhammā)、无量诸法(《法集论·三法本母》11)、无上诸法」等(《法集论·二法本母》11)之法,也说了殊胜的诸法。因此,为[令人]善巧于此[阿毗达摩]的语义,[便]说了此[偈]——

Ettha ca ‘‘rūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāveti’’ (dha. sa. 251), ‘‘mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’tiādinā (vibha. 642) nayena vuḍḍhimantopi dhammā vuttā. ‘‘Rūpārammaṇaṃ vā saddārammaṇaṃ vā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1) nayena ārammaṇādīhi lakkhaṇīyattā salakkhaṇāpi. ‘‘Sekkhā dhammā, asekkhā dhammā, lokuttarā dhammā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. tikamātikā 11, dukamātikā 12) nayena pūjitāpi, pūjārahāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Phasso hoti, vedanā hotī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1) nayena sabhāvaparicchinnattā paricchinnāpi. ‘‘Mahaggatā dhammā, appamāṇā dhammā (dha. sa. tikamātikā 11), anuttarā dhammā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. dukamātikā 11) nayena adhikāpi dhammā vuttā. Tenetametassa vacanatthakosallatthaṃ vuttaṃ –
已对照篇首

「此中,凡[诸法是]具增长的、具[自]相的、受尊崇的、被限定的,

‘‘Yaṃ ettha vuḍḍhimanto, salakkhaṇā pūjitā paricchinnā;
已对照篇首

以及[如上]所说的与殊胜的诸法——由此[便]被宣说为『阿毗达摩』。」

Vuttādhikā ca dhammā, abhidhammo tena akkhāto’’ti.
已对照篇首

而此中不别异[而共通]的那[一语],则——

Yaṃ panettha avisiṭṭhaṃ, taṃ –
已对照篇首

「精通『藏』义者,就教理(pariyatti)与容器之义而说『藏』;

‘‘Piṭakaṃ piṭakatthavidū, pariyattibbhājanatthato āhu;
已对照篇首

由此[语]相合而后,律等三者也[皆]应如是知。」

Tena samodhānetvā, tayopi vinayādayo ñeyyā’’.
已对照篇首

因为教理也在「不要[依]藏经传授」等[语]中(《增支部》3.66)被称为「藏」;而在「于是有人取了锄与筐而来」等[语]中(《增支部》3.70),任何容器[也称为「藏」]。所以说:「精通『藏』义者,就教理与容器之义而说『藏』。」

Pariyattipi hi ‘‘mā piṭakasampadānenā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) piṭakanti vuccati. ‘‘Atha puriso āgaccheyya kudālapiṭakamādāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.70) yaṃ kiñci bhājanampi. Tasmā ‘piṭakaṃ piṭakatthavidū pariyattibhājanatthato āhu.
PTS 1.19已对照篇首

如今[说]「由此[语]相合而后,律等三者也[皆]应如是知」[一句]:即以这具二种义的「藏」一语作成复合[词]——「它既是律,又是藏,由于是教理之性,又由于是各各义的容器」,故为「律藏」;依已说的同一方法,「它既是经,又是藏」,故为「经藏」;「它既是阿毗达摩,又是藏」,故为「论藏」。如是,这律等三者[皆]应如是知。

Idāni ‘tena samodhānetvā tayopi vinayādayo ñeyyā’ti, tena evaṃ duvidhatthena piṭakasaddena saha samāsaṃ katvā vinayo ca so piṭakañca pariyattibhāvato, tassa tassa atthassa bhājanato cāti vinayapiṭakaṃ, yathāvutteneva nayena suttantañca taṃ piṭakañcāti suttantapiṭakaṃ, abhidhammo ca so piṭakañcāti abhidhammapiṭakanti. Evamete tayopi vinayādayo ñeyyā.
已对照篇首

而这样了知之后,为于那些藏中[得]种种善巧故——

Evaṃ ñatvā ca punapi tesuyeva piṭakesu nānappakārakosallatthaṃ –
已对照篇首

「于彼[三藏]中,应随其所应阐明教说、教诫、论之差别;

‘‘Desanāsāsanakathābhedaṃ tesu yathārahaṃ;
已对照篇首

亦应阐明学、断与甚深性。

Sikkhāppahānagambhīrabhāvañca paridīpaye.
已对照篇首

教理之差别、成就以及失坏,凡于何处、

Pariyattibhedaṃ sampattiṃ, vipattiñcāpi yaṃ yahiṃ;
已对照篇首

比丘如何得[之]——这一切也都应说明。」

Pāpuṇāti yathā bhikkhu, tampi sabbaṃ vibhāvaye’’.
缅 1.20已对照篇首

此中,这[便]是[那]阐明与说明。因为这三藏依次被称为:教令、言说、胜义之教说;随[所]犯、随[所]顺、如法之教诫;以及律仪与胜律仪、见之解开、名色之限定之论。此中,律藏由于是堪施行教令的世尊多以教令[之方式]所教说的,[故]称为「教令之教说」;经藏由于是善巧于言说的世尊多以言说[之方式]所教说的,[故]称为「言说之教说」;论藏由于是善巧于胜义的世尊多以胜义[之方式]所教说的,[故]称为「胜义之教说」。

Tatrāyaṃ paridīpanā vibhāvanā ca. Etāni hi tīṇi piṭakāni yathākkamaṃ āṇāvohāraparamatthadesanā, yathāparādhayathānulomayathādhammasāsanāni, saṃvarāsaṃvaradiṭṭhiviniveṭhananāmarūpaparicchedakathāti ca vuccanti. Ettha hi vinayapiṭakaṃ āṇārahena bhagavatā āṇābāhullato desitattā āṇādesanā, suttantapiṭakaṃ vohārakusalena bhagavatā vohārabāhullato desitattā vohāradesanā, abhidhammapiṭakaṃ paramatthakusalena bhagavatā paramatthabāhullato desitattā paramatthadesanāti vuccati.
已对照篇首

同样,第一[藏]——「凡那些犯[戒]众多的众生,[他们]于此中随其所犯而被教诫」,故为「随犯之教诫」;第二[藏]——「有种种意乐、随眠、性行、胜解的众生,[他们]于此中随其所顺而被教诫」,故为「随顺之教诫」;第三[藏]——「于唯是法之聚[上]作『我、我所』之想的众生,[他们]于此中随法而被教诫」,故称为「如法之教诫」。

Tathā paṭhamaṃ – ‘ye te pacurāparādhā sattā, te yathāparādhaṃ ettha sāsitā’ti yathāparādhasāsanaṃ, dutiyaṃ – ‘anekajjhāsayānusayacariyādhimuttikā sattā yathānulomaṃ ettha sāsitā’ti yathānulomasāsanaṃ, tatiyaṃ – ‘dhammapuñjamatte ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti saññino sattā yathādhammaṃ ettha sāsitā’ti yathādhammasāsananti vuccati.
已对照篇首

同样,第一[藏]——「作为越行(ajjhācāra)之对治的律仪与胜律仪于此中被讲说」,故为「律仪与胜律仪之论」。「律仪与胜律仪(saṃvarāsaṃvara)」者:即小的与大的律仪,犹如「业与胜业(kammākamma)」、「果与胜果(phalāphala)」[一般]。第二[藏]——「作为六十二见之对治的见之解开于此中被讲说」,故为「见之解开之论」;第三[藏]——「作为贪等之对治的名色之限定于此中被讲说」,故称为「名色之限定之论」。

Tathā paṭhamaṃ – ajjhācārapaṭipakkhabhūto saṃvarāsaṃvaro ettha kathitoti saṃvarāsaṃvarakathā. Saṃvarāsaṃvaroti khuddako ceva mahanto ca saṃvaro, kammākammaṃ viya, phalāphalaṃ viya ca, dutiyaṃ – ‘‘dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhipaṭipakkhabhūtā diṭṭhiviniveṭhanā ettha kathitā’’ti diṭṭhiviniveṭhanakathā, tatiyaṃ – ‘‘rāgādipaṭipakkhabhūto nāmarūpaparicchedo ettha kathito’’ti nāmarūpaparicchedakathāti vuccati.
已对照篇首

而于这三[藏]中,应知三学、三种断与四种甚深性。正是如此:于律藏中特别说了增上戒学,于经藏中[说了]增上心学,于论藏中[说了]增上慧学。

Tīsupi cetesu tisso sikkhā, tīṇi pahānāni, catubbidho ca gambhīrabhāvo veditabbo. Tathā hi vinayapiṭake visesena adhisīlasikkhā vuttā, suttantapiṭake adhicittasikkhā, abhidhammapiṭake adhipaññāsikkhā.
PTS 1.20已对照篇首

又于律藏中是违犯之断,因为戒是违犯的对治。于经藏中是缠(pariyuṭṭhāna)之断,因为定是缠的对治。于论藏中是随眠之断,因为慧是随眠的对治。又于第一[藏]中是彼分断,于其余[二藏]中是镇伏断与正断断。又于第一[藏]中是恶行杂染之断,于其余[二藏]中是渴爱杂染与见杂染之断。

Vinayapiṭake ca vītikkamappahānaṃ, kilesānaṃ vītikkamapaṭipakkhattā sīlassa. Suttantapiṭake pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ, pariyuṭṭhānapaṭipakkhattā samādhissa. Abhidhammapiṭake anusayappahānaṃ, anusayapaṭipakkhattā paññāya. Paṭhame ca tadaṅgappahānaṃ, itaresu vikkhambhanasamucchedappahānāni. Paṭhame ca duccaritasaṃkilesappahānaṃ, itaresu taṇhādiṭṭhisaṃkilesappahānaṃ.
缅 1.21已对照篇首

而于此[三藏]中的每一[藏],也应知法、义、教说、通达[这]四种甚深性。此中,「法」即圣典(tanti)。「义」即那[圣典]本身之义。「教说」即对那以意所确立的圣典之教说。「通达」即对圣典与圣典之义的如实了悟。而于这三[藏]中[都有]这些法、义、教说、通达。由于[它们]如大海之于兔等一般,为钝慧者所难以深入、且不可得立足处,所以是甚深的。如是,于此[三藏]中的每一[藏],也应知[这]四种甚深性。

Ekamekasmiñcettha catubbidhopi dhammatthadesanā paṭivedhagambhīrabhāvo veditabbo. Tattha dhammoti tanti. Atthoti tassāyeva attho. Desanāti tassā manasā vavatthāpitāya tantiyā desanā. Paṭivedhoti tantiyā tantiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho. Tīsupi cetesu ete dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhā. Yasmā sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo mandabuddhīhi dukkhogāḷhā alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Evaṃ ekamekasmiṃ ettha catubbidhopi gambhīrabhāvo veditabbo.
已对照篇首

另一方法:「法」即因。这曾说过——「于因之智[是]法无碍解」。「义」即因之果,这也曾说过——「于因之果之智[是]义无碍解」(《分别论》720)。「教说」即施设,意趣是「如其法而[作]法之称说(dhammābhilāpa)」;或者[即]依顺、逆、略、广等之力而作的讲说。「通达」即现观;而它[有]世间与出世间[二种],[即]依境与依无痴——[是]于诸法中随顺于义、于诸义中随顺于法、于诸施设中随顺于施设之路的了悟。或者,[通达]即对那各各处所说的各各诸法所应通达的、称为自相的、不颠倒的自性。

Aparo nayo, dhammoti hetu. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā’’ti. Atthoti hetuphalaṃ, vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘hetuphale ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā’’ti (vibha. 720). Desanāti paññatti, yathā dhammaṃ dhammābhilāpoti adhippāyo. Anulomapaṭilomasaṅkhepavitthārādivasena vā kathanaṃ. Paṭivedhoti abhisamayo, so ca lokiyalokuttaro visayato asammohato ca, atthānurūpaṃ dhammesu, dhammānurūpaṃ atthesu, paññattipathānurūpaṃ paññattīsu avabodho. Tesaṃ tesaṃ vā tattha tattha vuttadhammānaṃ paṭivijjhitabbo salakkhaṇasaṅkhāto aviparītasabhāvo.
已对照篇首

如今,由于在这些藏中,无论是哪一种法之类或义之类;以及这[教说]——凡所应令知之义如何如何成为诸听者之智的所对面,便依那样那样而阐明那义的教说;以及此中称为不颠倒觉了的通达,或者那些那些法所应通达的、称为自相的不颠倒本性——这一切,对未积集善资粮的钝慧者[而言],如大海之于兔等一般,难以深入、又是得不到立足处的,所以是甚深(gambhīra)的。如是,于此每一[藏]中也应了知这四种甚深性。

Idāni yasmā etesu piṭakesu yaṃ yaṃ dhammajātaṃ vā atthajātaṃ vā, yā cāyaṃ yathā yathā ñāpetabbo attho sotūnaṃ ñāṇassa abhimukho hoti, tathā tathā tadatthajotikā desanā, yo cettha aviparītāvabodhasaṅkhāto paṭivedho, tesaṃ tesaṃ vā dhammānaṃ paṭivijjhitabbo salakkhaṇasaṅkhāto aviparītasabhāvo. Sabbampetaṃ anupacitakusalasambhārehi duppaññehi sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo dukkhogāḷhaṃ alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhañca, tasmā gambhīraṃ. Evampi ekamekasmiṃ ettha catubbidhopi gambhīrabhāvo veditabbo.
已对照篇首

而至此——

Ettāvatā ca –
已对照篇首

「教说、教诫、论说——于此[三者]随其所应[各别阐明其]差别;

‘‘Desanāsāsanakathā, bhedaṃ tesu yathārahaṃ;
PTS 1.21已对照篇首

学、诸断与甚深之性,[这些]亦应阐明。」——

Sikkhāppahānagambhīra, bhāvañca paridīpaye’’ti –
已对照篇首

这首偈颂的义已如上所说。

Ayaṃ gāthā vuttatthāva hoti.
已对照篇首

「教理之差别、成就,以及失坏——凡[比丘]于何处[所得]者;

‘‘Pariyattibhedaṃ sampattiṃ, vipattiñcāpi yaṃ yahiṃ;
已对照篇首

比丘如何获得[之],那一切也都应显明。」——

Pāpuṇāti yathā bhikkhu, tampi sabbaṃ vibhāvaye’’ti –
已对照篇首

而此中,于三藏中应见有三种教理之差别。因为教理(pariyatti)有三种——毒蛇喻之教理、度脱之教理、库藏者之教理。

Ettha pana tīsu piṭakesu tividho pariyattibhedo daṭṭhabbo. Tisso hi pariyattiyo – alagaddūpamā, nissaraṇatthā, bhaṇḍāgārikapariyattīti.
缅 1.22已对照篇首

此中,凡是被恶把持的、为求过(upārambha)等之故而学得的,这[便]是毒蛇喻[之教理]。就它而说了这[语]——「诸比丘,犹如有个人求毒蛇、觅毒蛇、游行寻找毒蛇。他看见一条大毒蛇,便去抓它的身或尾。那条毒蛇便回身咬他的手、臂或其余某个肢节。他便因此而遭死亡,或受近于死亡之苦。这是什么缘故呢?诸比丘,因为对毒蛇的恶把持。诸比丘,正是这样,此处有些愚痴人学法——经……乃至……智解。他们学了那法之后,不以慧详察那些法之义。那些法于不详察其义者便不堪于谛观。他们学法唯以求过为利益,并以脱免他说为利益。而他们为之而学法的那个义,他们却不领受。他们那些被恶把持的法,长夜导致不利与苦。这是什么缘故呢?诸比丘,因为诸法被恶把持。」(《中部》1.238)

Tattha yā duggahitā, upārambhādihetu pariyāpuṭā, ayaṃ alagaddūpamā. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso alagaddatthiko alagaddagavesī alagaddapariyesanaṃ caramāno, so passeyya mahantaṃ alagaddaṃ, tamenaṃ bhoge vā naṅguṭṭhe vā gaṇheyya, tassa so alagaddo paṭiparivattitvā hatthe vā bāhāyaṃ vā aññatarasmiṃ vā aṅgapaccaṅge ḍaṃseyya, so tato nidānaṃ maraṇaṃ vā nigaccheyya, maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkhaṃ. Taṃ kissa hetu? Duggahitattā, bhikkhave, alagaddassa. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, idhekacce moghapurisā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, suttaṃ…pe… vedallaṃ, te taṃ dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā tesaṃ dhammānaṃ paññāya atthaṃ na upaparikkhanti, tesaṃ te dhammā paññāya atthaṃ anupaparikkhataṃ na nijjhānaṃ khamanti, te upārambhānisaṃsā ceva dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, itivādappamokkhānisaṃsā ca, yassa catthāya dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, tañcassa atthaṃ nānubhonti, tesaṃ te dhammā duggahitā dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Duggahitattā, bhikkhave, dhammāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.238).
已对照篇首

而凡是被善把持的、由唯希求戒蕴等之圆满者所学得的,不是为求过等之故[而学]的,这[便]是度脱之教理。就它而说了这[语]——「他们那些被善把持的法,长夜导致利益与安乐。这是什么缘故呢?诸比丘,因为诸法被善把持。」(《中部》1.239)

Yā pana suggahitā sīlakkhandhādipāripūriṃyeva ākaṅkhamānena pariyāpuṭā, na upārambhādihetu, ayaṃ nissaraṇatthā. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘tesaṃ te dhammā suggahitā dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattanti. Taṃ kissa hetu? Suggahitattā, bhikkhave, dhammāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.239).
已对照篇首

而凡是已遍知诸蕴、已断烦恼、已修道、已通达不动、已现证灭、诸漏已尽[者],唯为护持相承之故、为守护法系之故而学的,这[便]是库藏者之教理。

Yaṃ pana pariññātakkhandho pahīnakileso bhāvitamaggo paṭividdhākuppo sacchikatanirodho khīṇāsavo kevalaṃ paveṇīpālanatthāya vaṃsānurakkhaṇatthāya pariyāpuṇāti, ayaṃ bhaṇḍāgārikapariyattīti.
PTS 1.22已对照篇首

而于律善行道的比丘,依戒的成就而获得三明;并且在那里[所]宣说的分类也唯是那[三明]的。于经善行道[的比丘],依定的成就而获得六神通;并且在那里[所]宣说的分类也唯是那[六神通]的。于论善行道[的比丘],依慧的成就而获得四无碍解;并且[所]宣说的分类也正唯是那[四无碍解]在那里的[分类]。如是,于这些[藏]善行道者便依次获得这以三明、六神通、四无碍解为别的成就。

Vinaye pana suppaṭipanno bhikkhu sīlasampadaṃ nissāya tisso vijjā pāpuṇāti, tāsaṃyeva ca tattha pabhedavacanato. Sutte suppaṭipanno samādhisampadaṃ nissāya cha abhiññā pāpuṇāti, tāsaṃyeva ca tattha pabhedavacanato. Abhidhamme suppaṭipanno paññāsampadaṃ nissāya catasso paṭisambhidā pāpuṇāti, tāsañca tattheva pabhedavacanato, evametesu suppaṭipanno yathākkamena imaṃ vijjāttayachaḷabhiññācatuppaṭisambhidābhedaṃ sampattiṃ pāpuṇāti.
缅 1.23已对照篇首

而于律恶行道的人,由于[与]所许的、触之为乐的敷具与覆物等之触有共通之处,便于所遮的执取[色]之触等上成为有无过之想者。因为也说过这[语]——「我如是了知世尊所说之法:凡那些为世尊说为障碍法的我的障碍法,受用它们并不足以成障碍。」(《中部》1.234)由此而到达破戒之性。于经恶行道的人,于「诸比丘,有这四种人存在、可得」等[语](《增支部》4.5)中不知[其]意趣,便作恶把持;就它而说了这[语]——「[他]以自己所恶把持的[法]既诽谤我们,又掘伤自己,并招致许多非福。」(《中部》1.236)由此而到达邪见性。于论恶行道的人,于法之思察(dhammacintā,[即]对法之自性的审察)上过度奔驰,连不可思议的[事]也思议。由此而到达心智错乱(cittakkhepa);因为也说过这[语]——「诸比丘,有这四种不可思议[事],是不应思议的;思议它们的人,便会分得狂乱与败坏。」(《增支部》4.77)如是,于这些[藏]恶行道者便依次遭遇这以破戒之性、邪见性、心智错乱为别的失坏。

Vinaye pana duppaṭipanno anuññātasukhasamphassaattharaṇapāvuraṇādiphassasāmaññato paṭikkhittesu upādinnakaphassādīsu anavajjasaññī hoti. Vuttampi hetaṃ – ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi, yathā ye me antarāyikā dhammā antarāyikā vuttā bhagavatā, te paṭisevato nālaṃ antarāyāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.234). Tato dussīlabhāvaṃ pāpuṇāti. Sutte duppaṭipanno – ‘‘cattāro me, bhikkhave, puggalā santo saṃvijjamānā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.5) adhippāyaṃ ajānanto duggahitaṃ gaṇhāti, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘attanā duggahitena amhe ceva abbhācikkhati, attānañca khaṇati, bahuñca apuññaṃ pasavatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.236). Tato micchādiṭṭhitaṃ pāpuṇāti. Abhidhamme duppaṭipanno dhammacintaṃ atidhāvanto acinteyyānipi cinteti. Tato cittakkhepaṃ pāpuṇāti, vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, acinteyyāni, na cintetabbāni, yāni cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti (a. ni. 4.77). Evametesu duppaṭipanno yathākkamena imaṃ dussīlabhāva micchādiṭṭhitā cittakkhepabhedaṃ vipattiṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti.
已对照篇首

而至此——

Ettāvatā ca –
已对照篇首

「教理之差别、成就,以及失坏——凡[比丘]于何处[所得]者;

‘‘Pariyattibhedaṃ sampattiṃ, vipattiñcāpi yaṃ yahiṃ;
已对照篇首

比丘如何获得[之],那一切也都应显明。」——

Pāpuṇāti yathā bhikkhu, tampi sabbaṃ vibhāvaye’’ti –
已对照篇首

这首偈颂的义也已如上所说。如是,依种种方式了知诸藏之后,应知这佛语依它们而为三种。

Ayampi gāthā vuttatthāva hoti. Evaṃ nānappakārato piṭakāni ñatvā tesaṃ vasenetaṃ buddhavacanaṃ tividhanti ñātabbaṃ.
已对照篇首

如何依部为五种?这一切确实只分为长部、中部、相应部、增支部、小部五类。此中,什么是长部?[即]由三品所汇集的、以《梵网[经]》等为首的三十四部经。

Kathaṃ nikāyavasena pañcavidhaṃ? Sabbameva cetaṃ dīghanikāyo, majjhimanikāyo, saṃyuttanikāyo, aṅguttaranikāyo, khuddakanikāyoti pañcappabhedaṃ hoti. Tattha katamo dīghanikāyo? Tivaggasaṅgahāni brahmajālādīni catuttiṃsa suttāni.
已对照篇首

「凡以三品为其汇集的三十四部经文,

‘‘Catuttiṃseva suttantā, tivaggo yassa saṅgaho;
已对照篇首

此即『长部』——[为]第一、[且]随顺[于义]者。」

Esa dīghanikāyoti, paṭhamo anulomiko’’ti.
PTS 1.23缅 1.24已对照篇首

而这[部]为何称为『长部』呢?由于[它是]长篇幅诸经的聚集与住处。因为聚集与住处[皆]称为『部(nikāya)』。「诸比丘,我不见有另外任何一部[众生]是这样种种[差别]的,如诸比丘,这些趣畜生的众生[那样]。」(《相应部》2.100)以及『布尼迦部(poṇikanikāya)』『支佉利迦部(cikkhallikanikāya)』——[布尼迦与支佉利迦是刹帝利,此[二]即是他们的住处]——等等;此中这些[便是]从教说与从世间[两方面]的成立[之证]。如是,于其余[诸部]之为『部』上,也应了知[其]语义。

Kasmā panesa dīghanikāyoti vuccati? Dīghappamāṇānaṃ suttānaṃ samūhato nivāsato ca. Samūhanivāsā hi nikāyoti vuccanti. ‘‘Nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekanikāyampi samanupassāmi evaṃ cittaṃ, yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, tiracchānagatā pāṇā’’ (saṃ. ni. 2.100). Poṇikanikāyo cikkhallikanikāyoti evamādīni cettha sādhakāni sāsanato lokato ca. Evaṃ sesānampi nikāyabhāve vacanattho veditabbo.
已对照篇首

什么是中部?[即]中等篇幅的、由十五品所汇集的、以《根本法门经》等为首的一百五十[部]经,又二部经。

Katamo majjhimanikāyo? Majjhimappamāṇāni pañcadasavaggasaṅgahāni mūlapariyāyasuttādīni diyaḍḍhasataṃ dve ca suttāni.
已对照篇首

「一百五十部经文,又二部经,[皆]在其中;

‘‘Diyaḍḍhasatasuttantā, dve ca suttāni yattha so;
已对照篇首

[此]即中部,为十五品所收摄。」

Nikāyo majjhimo pañca, dasavaggapariggaho’’ti.
已对照篇首

什么是相应部?[即]依天神相应等而说的、以《渡暴流经》等为首的七千[部]经、七百[部]经,又六十二部经。

Katamo saṃyuttanikāyo? Devatāsaṃyuttādivasena kathitāni oghataraṇādīni satta suttasahassāni satta ca suttasatāni dvāsaṭṭhi ca suttāni.
已对照篇首

「七千部经,又七百部经;

‘‘Sattasuttasahassāni, sattasuttasatāni ca;
已对照篇首

更有六十二部经,此即相应[部]之总集。」

Dvāsaṭṭhi ceva suttantā, eso saṃyuttasaṅgaho’’ti.
已对照篇首

什么是增支部?[即]依一一支递增而说的、以《心遍取经》(Cittapariyādāna)等为首的九千[部]经、五百[部]经,又五十七部经。

Katamo aṅguttaranikāyo? Ekekaaṅgātirekavasena kathitāni cittapariyādānādīni nava suttasahassāni pañca suttasatāni sattapaññāsañca suttāni.
已对照篇首

「九千部经,又五百部经;

‘‘Nava suttasahassāni, pañca suttasatāni ca;
已对照篇首

[及]五十七部经,此[即]《增支部》中的数目。」

Sattapaññāsa suttāni, saṅkhyā aṅguttare aya’’nti.
已对照篇首

什么是《小部》?[即]整个律藏、论藏,以及先前所显示的以《小诵》为首的十五分——[总而言之,即]除去[这]四部之外其余的佛语。

Katamo khuddakanikāyo? Sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ, abhidhammapiṭakaṃ, khuddakapāṭhādayo ca pubbe dassitā pañcadasappabhedā, ṭhapetvā cattāro nikāye avasesaṃ buddhavacanaṃ.
已对照篇首

「除去以《长部》为首的这四部,

‘‘Ṭhapetvā caturopete, nikāye dīghaādike;
已对照篇首

其余的佛语,[即]被认为是《小部》。」

Tadaññaṃ buddhavacanaṃ, nikāyo khuddako mato’’ti.
已对照篇首

如是,依部而为五种。

Evaṃ nikāyavasena pañcavidhaṃ.
PTS 1.24缅 1.25已对照篇首

如何依支而为九种?因为这一切[佛语]正是成为经、应颂、记说、偈颂、自说、如是语、本生、未曾有法、智解(vedalla)[这]九分。此中,《两部分别》《义释》《犍度》《附随》,《经集》中的《吉祥经》《宝经》《那罗迦经》《迅速经》,以及其余以「经」为名的如来之语,应知[皆]为「经」。一切有偈的经应知为「应颂」,特别是《相应部》中整个《有偈品》。整个论藏、无偈的经,以及其余不被[余]八分所摄的佛语——那[一切]应知为「记说」。《法句》《长老偈》《长老尼偈》以及《经集》中不以「经」为名的纯偈,应知为「偈颂」。那以喜悦智所成之偈相应的八十二部经应知为「自说」。那以「此是世尊所说」等方式转起的一百一十部经应知为「如是语」。《无戏论本生》等五百五十个本生应知为「本生」。那以「诸比丘,阿难有这四种希有未曾有法」等方式转起的(《长部》2.209)一切与希有未曾有法相应的诸经应知为「未曾有法」。《小智解》《大智解》《正见经》《帝释所问》《行分别》《大满月经》等一切一再得智(veda)与喜悦而问[答]的诸经应知为「智解」。如是,依支而为九种。

Kathaṃ aṅgavasena navavidhaṃ? Sabbameva hidaṃ suttaṃ, geyyaṃ, veyyākaraṇaṃ, gāthā, udānaṃ, itivuttakaṃ, jātakaṃ, abbhutadhammaṃ, vedallanti navappabhedaṃ hoti. Tattha ubhatovibhaṅganiddesakhandhakaparivārā, suttanipāte maṅgalasuttaratanasuttanālakasuttatuvaṭṭakasuttāni ca aññampi ca suttanāmakaṃ tathāgatavacanaṃ suttanti veditabbaṃ. Sabbampi sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyanti veditabbaṃ. Visesena saṃyuttake sakalopi sagāthavaggo, sakalampi abhidhammapiṭakaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ, yañca aññampi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi asaṅgahitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ, taṃ veyyākaraṇanti veditabbaṃ. Dhammapadaṃ, theragāthā, therīgāthā, suttanipāte nosuttanāmikā suddhikagāthā ca gāthāti veditabbā. Somanassaññāṇamayikagāthā paṭisaṃyuttā dveasīti suttantā udānanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādinayappavattā dasuttarasatasuttantā itivuttakanti veditabbaṃ. Apaṇṇakajātakādīni paññāsādhikāni pañcajātakasatāni ‘jātaka’nti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Cattārome, bhikkhave, acchariyā abbhutā dhammā ānande’’tiādinayappavattā (dī. ni. 2.209) sabbepi acchariyabbhutadhammapaṭisaṃyuttasuttantā abbhutadhammanti veditabbaṃ. Cūḷavedalla-mahāvedalla-sammādiṭṭhi-sakkapañha-saṅkhārabhājaniya-mahāpuṇṇamasuttādayo sabbepi vedañca tuṭṭhiñca laddhā laddhā pucchitasuttantā vedallanti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ aṅgavasena navavidhaṃ.
已对照篇首

如何依法蕴而为八万四千种?这一切佛语——

Kathaṃ dhammakkhandhavasena caturāsītisahassavidhaṃ? Sabbameva cetaṃ buddhavacanaṃ –
已对照篇首

「八万二千[法]我从佛[处]领受,二千[法]从比丘[处领受];

‘‘Dvāsīti buddhato gaṇhiṃ, dve sahassāni bhikkhuto;
已对照篇首

[共]八万四千[法蕴],是我所熟练的诸法。」

Caturāsīti sahassāni, ye me dhammā pavattino’’ti.
已对照篇首

如是,依[如上]所显明的法蕴而成八万四千分。此中,[只]有一个连贯(anusandhi)的经[即]一个法蕴。凡有多个连贯的[经],于其中[便]依连贯[之数]而计算法蕴。于诸偈所成[之经]中,问之提问[即]一个法蕴,解答[即]一个。于论[藏]中,每一个三法与二法的分别,以及每一个心栏(cittavāra)的分别,[各]是一个法蕴。于律中,有事(vatthu),有本母(mātikā),有句分别(padabhājanīya),有中间罪(antarāpatti),有罪(āpatti),有无罪(anāpatti),有三[句]之断定(tikaccheda)。此中,每一个部分(koṭṭhāsa)应知[即]一个法蕴。如是,依法蕴而为八万四千种。

Evaṃ paridīpitadhammakkhandhavasena caturāsītisahassappabhedaṃ hoti. Tattha ekānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ eko dhammakkhandho. Yaṃ anekānusandhikaṃ, tattha anusandhivasena dhammakkhandhagaṇanā. Gāthābandhesu pañhāpucchanaṃ eko dhammakkhandho, vissajjanaṃ eko. Abhidhamme ekamekaṃ tikadukabhājanaṃ, ekamekañca cittavārabhājanaṃ, ekameko dhammakkhandho. Vinaye atthi vatthu, atthi mātikā, atthi padabhājanīyaṃ, atthi antarāpatti, atthi āpatti, atthi anāpatti, atthi tikacchedo. Tattha ekameko koṭṭhāso ekameko dhammakkhandhoti veditabbo. Evaṃ dhammakkhandhavasena caturāsītisahassavidhaṃ.
PTS 1.25缅 1.26已对照篇首

如是,这依不分别而以味(rasa)为一种、依分别而以法与律等为二种等分的佛语,由结集[它]的以大迦叶为首的得自在者(vasī)之众,确立了「这是法,这是律;这是初佛语,这是中佛语,这是后佛语;这是律藏,这是经藏,这是论藏;这是《长部》……乃至……这是《小部》;这些是经等九支;这些是八万四千法蕴」这一分类之后,才正这样结集的。而不[止]是这[一分类],其余于三藏中所见的种种摄集之分——摄颂之摄集、品之摄集、略说之摄集、一集与二集等诸集之摄集、相应之摄集、五十[集]之摄集等——也正是确立了[之后],才于七个月中结集完毕的。

Evametaṃ abhedato rasavasena ekavidhaṃ, bhedato dhammavinayādivasena duvidhādibhedaṃ buddhavacanaṃ saṅgāyantena mahākassapappamukhena vasīgaṇena ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo, ayaṃ vinayo, idaṃ paṭhamabuddhavacanaṃ, idaṃ majjhimabuddhavacanaṃ, idaṃ pacchimabuddhavacanaṃ, idaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ, idaṃ suttantapiṭakaṃ, idaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ, ayaṃ dīghanikāyo…pe… ayaṃ khuddakanikāyo, imāni suttādīni navaṅgāni, imāni caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti, imaṃ pabhedaṃ vavatthapetvāva saṅgītaṃ. Na kevalañca imameva, aññampi uddānasaṅgaha-vaggasaṅgaha-peyyālasaṅgaha-ekakanipāta-dukanipātādinipātasaṅgaha-saṃyuttasaṅgaha-paṇṇāsasaṅgahādi-anekavidhaṃ tīsu piṭakesu sandissamānaṃ saṅgahappabhedaṃ vavatthapetvā eva sattahi māsehi saṅgītaṃ.
已对照篇首

而于[此]结集终了之时,这大地由「大迦叶长老已令十力[者]的教法堪于转起五千年之量的时间」[这一念]所生起的欢悦,仿佛给予善哉[之声]一般,以水为边际,多种多样地震动、遍震动、极震动、遍战动;又有许多稀有[之事]显现了。这[便]名为「第一次大结集」。它在世间——

Saṅgītipariyosāne cassa – ‘‘idaṃ mahākassapattherena dasabalassa sāsanaṃ pañcavassasahassaparimāṇakālaṃ pavattanasamatthaṃ kata’’nti sañjātappamodā sādhukāraṃ viya dadamānā ayaṃ mahāpathavī udakapariyantaṃ katvā anekappakāraṃ kampi saṅkampi sampakampi sampavedhi, anekāni ca acchariyāni pāturahesunti, ayaṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti nāma. Yā loke –
已对照篇首

「由五百[位]所作,故[名]『五百[结集]』;

‘‘Satehi pañcahi katā, tena pañcasatāti ca;
已对照篇首

又由唯是诸长老所作,[故]被称为『长老[结集]』。」

Thereheva katattā ca, therikāti pavuccatī’’ti.
已对照篇首

复注

已对照篇首

序论释义

PTS 1.1缅 1.1已对照篇首

于释义之初[所作]的三宝礼敬,是为了告知所应释义之法的出处所依之清净;而那[告知],是为了令诸有识者于法之诸释义生起敬重;而那[敬重],是为了以彼等依受持、忆持等次第所应获得的正行道,正正当当地成办一切利益与安乐。 或者,由于是吉祥,由于是于一切作业中的先行之事,由于是诸智者所正行的,又由于将来使他人随所见而行——[故]于释义中[有]三宝敬礼之作业。 或者,作三宝敬礼是为了生起「供养应供养者」这一殊胜之福。而那[福]是为了令自己那以如所得的成就为因相的业生起力量,并且是为了使它中途不退缩;那两者[则]是为了义注无有障碍地完成。 而正是这一目的为阿阇梨于此处所意指。正因如此,[他]将说「如是,由我这心意净信者[所作]的……乃至……以它的威力」。 由对三事的供养,以无上福田之善成就,[所成]是威力不可计量的殊胜之福;故纵在障碍多种的世间聚居中,[它]也能摧毁那系缚障碍的一切杂染,并遮止怖畏等灾祸。如所说——

Saṃvaṇṇanārambhe ratanattayavandanā saṃvaṇṇetabbassa dhammassa pabhavanissayavisuddhipaṭivedanatthaṃ, taṃ pana dhammasaṃvaṇṇanāsu viññūnaṃ bahumānuppādanatthaṃ, taṃ sammadeva tesaṃ uggahadhāraṇādikkamaladdhabbāya sammāpaṭipattiyā sabbahitasukhanipphādanatthaṃ. Atha vā maṅgalabhāvato, sabbakiriyāsu pubbakiccabhāvato, paṇḍitehi sammācaritabhāvato, āyatiṃ paresaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanato ca saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ ratanattayapaṇāmakiriyā. Atha vā ratanattayapaṇāmakaraṇaṃ pūjanīyapūjāpuññavisesanibbattanatthaṃ, taṃ attano yathāladdhasampattinimittakassa kammassa balānuppādanatthaṃ, antarā ca tassa asaṅkocanatthaṃ, tadubhayaṃ anantarāyena aṭṭhakathāya parisamāpanatthaṃ. Idameva ca payojanaṃ ācariyena idhādhippetaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati – ‘‘iti me pasannamatino…pe… tassānubhāvenā’’ti. Vatthuttayapūjā hi niratisayapuññakkhettasambuddhiyā aparimeyyappabhāvo puññātisayoti bahuvidhantarāyepi lokasannivāse antarāyanibandhanasakalasaṃkilesaviddhaṃsanāya pahoti, bhayādiupaddavañca nivāreti. Yathāha –
已对照篇首

「对应供养者作供养,无论[是]对佛陀或[对]诸弟子」等(《法句》195;《譬喻》1.10.1);同样——

‘‘Pūjārahe pūjayato, buddhe yadi va sāvake’’tiādi (dha. pa. 1.195; apa. 1.10.1), tathā –
PTS 1.2已对照篇首

「诸比丘,凡对佛有净信者,即是对最上者有净信;而对最上者有净信者,[其]异熟是最上的」等(《增支部》4.34;《如是语》90);

‘‘Ye bhikkhave buddhe pasannā, agge te pasannā. Agge kho pana pasannānaṃ aggo vipāko hotī’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90).
缅 1.2已对照篇首

「凡称说『佛陀』者, 身中所生的那喜——

‘‘Buddhoti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti;
已对照篇首

那喜确实更为殊胜, 胜过整个阎浮提(Jambudīpa)。

Varameva hi sā pīti, kasiṇenapi jambudīpassa.
已对照篇首

[称说]『法』者……乃至……[称说]『僧』者……乃至……[纵以]整个[阎浮]洲[之所有相比亦然]。」(《长部义注》1.6)

Dhammoti…pe… saṅghoti…pe… dīpassā’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.6);
Tathā –
已对照篇首

同样——

已对照篇首

「摩诃男(Mahānāma),当圣弟子随念如来之时,他于那时心不为贪所缠缚,不为瞋……乃至……心不为痴所缠缚」等(《增支部》6.10;11.11);

‘‘Yasmiṃ, mahānāma, samaye ariyasāvako tathāgataṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosa…pe… na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hotī’’tiādi (a. ni. 6.10; 11.11),
已对照篇首

「[无论]在林中、树下……乃至……

‘‘Araññe rukkhamūle vā…pe…
已对照篇首

或是怖畏,或是惊愕,

Bhayaṃ vā chambhitattaṃ vā,
已对照篇首

或是毛竖——[这些]都将不生。」(《相应部》1.249)

Lomahaṃso na hessatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.249) ca
已对照篇首

此中,为显示他所欲礼敬的那三事具有殊胜功德,[阿阇梨]以「[他]心因悲而清凉」等语说了三首偈。因为由具殊胜功德而有应受礼敬之性,而对应受礼敬者所作的礼敬能成办如所意指的目的。 此中,他所欲释义的那一教说,既不像律的教说那样以悲为主,也不像阿毗达摩的教说那样以慧为主,而是以悲与慧为主;因此,为先作那以此二者为主的、对正等正觉者的赞叹——[因为]其余诸宝以他为根本——[故]说了「[他]心因悲而清凉」等语。

Tattha yassa vatthuttayassa vandanaṃ kattukāmo, tassa guṇātisayayogasandassanatthaṃ ‘‘karuṇāsītalahadaya’’ntiādinā gāthattayamāha. Guṇātisayayogena hi vandanārahabhāvo, vandanārahe ca katā vandanā yathādhippetappayojanaṃ sādhetīti. Tattha yassā desanāya saṃvaṇṇanaṃ kattukāmo, sā na vinayadesanā viya karuṇāppadhānā, nāpi abhidhammadesanā viya paññāppadhānā, atha kho karuṇāpaññāppadhānāti tadubhayappadhānameva tāva sammāsambuddhassa thomanaṃ kātuṃ taṃmūlakattā sesaratanānaṃ ‘‘karuṇāsītalahadaya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
PTS 1.3缅 1.3已对照篇首

此中,「散除(kirati)」故为「悲(karuṇā)」,义即驱散、除去他人之苦。或者,「伤害(kiṇāti)」故为「悲」,义即他人有苦时,[它]损伤、恼害有悲者。或者,他人有苦时,[它]使诸善人震动、令心忧戚,故为「悲」。或者,「kam」即乐,[它]遮止那[乐],故为「悲」——因为它以欲除他人之苦为相,由不顾自乐而遮止、障碍有悲者的乐。 因悲而清凉,[故为]「因悲而清凉」;他的心因悲而清凉,故为「心因悲而清凉者」;[礼敬]那位「心因悲而清凉」者。 此中,虽然慈与喜也因其以为他人带来利益、不欲其乐等衰减为自性,又因是瞋恨与不乐的正对治,[从而]以断除众生相续中之热恼的行相而转起,故也可得「令心清凉之因」[这一性质];然而悲——它以除苦的行相而转起,以不堪他人之受苦为味,[即]是不害——特别地如心轻安一般,是世尊之心清凉之性的因相;[故]说了「[他]心因悲而清凉」。 或者应知:以悲为门,慈与喜的「令心清凉之因」性也[一并]被说到了。

Tattha kiratīti karuṇā, paradukkhaṃ vikkhipati, apanetīti attho. Atha vā kiṇātīti karuṇā, paradukkhe sati kāruṇikaṃ hiṃsati, vibādhatīti attho, paradukkhe sati sādhūnaṃ kampanaṃ hadayakhedaṃ karotīti vā karuṇā. Atha vā kamiti sukhaṃ, taṃ rundhatīti karuṇā. Esā hi paradukkhāpanayanakāmatālakkhaṇā, attasukhanirapekkhatāya kāruṇikānaṃ sukhaṃ rundhati vibandhatīti. Karuṇāya sītalaṃ karuṇāsītalaṃ, karuṇāsītalaṃ hadayaṃ assāti karuṇāsītalahadayo, taṃ karuṇāsītalahadayaṃ. Tattha kiñcāpi paresaṃ hitopasaṃhārasukhādiaparihānicchanasabhāvatāya, byāpādāratīnaṃ ujuvipaccanīkatāya ca sattasantānagatasantāpavicchedanākārappavattiyā mettāmuditānampi cittasītalabhāvakāraṇatā upalabbhati, tathāpi dukkhāpanayanākārappavattiyā parūpatāpāsahanarasā avihiṃsābhūtā karuṇā visesena bhagavato cittassa cittapassaddhi viya sītībhāvanimittanti vuttaṃ ‘‘karuṇāsītalahadaya’’nti. Karuṇāmukhena vā mettāmuditānampi hadayasītalabhāvakāraṇatā vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
PTS 1.4已对照篇首

或者,那作为不共殊胜智之所系的、且如一切知智(sabbaññutaññāṇa)一般以遍布自境而极为殊胜、又无有余剩地趣得大悲之性的悲,才是世尊心清凉之性的殊胜之因;[故阿阇梨]说「[他]心因悲而清凉」。 或者,纵然慈与喜也系属于殊胜的心清凉之性,然而由于[悲]是一切佛德殊胜之因,也是那[慈喜二者]之因,故唯悲被说为世尊的令心清凉之因。因为一切佛德皆以悲为因缘。 因为世尊由悲的威力而令轮回之苦的热恼息灭;他由欲除他人之苦,纵经多阿僧祇(asaṅkheyya)劫也毫无疲厌之相,决定要无余地积集诸佛所作之法,并已证得法增上性;故纵然那些由众生与诸行所带来的、能令心热恼的因相就在近前,他心清凉之性也不曾有丝毫的变异。 而于这一义之分别中,应知世尊在三种阶位中的悲都已被摄取。

Atha vā asādhāraṇañāṇavisesanibandhanabhūtā sātisayaṃ niravasesañca sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ viya savisayabyāpitāya mahākaruṇābhāvaṃ upagatā karuṇāva bhagavato atisayena hadayasītalabhāvahetūti āha ‘‘karuṇāsītalahadaya’’nti. Atha vā satipi mettāmuditānaṃ sātisaye hadayasītībhāvanibandhanatte sakalabuddhaguṇavisesakāraṇatāya tāsampi kāraṇanti karuṇāva bhagavato hadayasītalabhāvakāraṇaṃ vuttā. Karuṇānidānā hi sabbepi buddhaguṇā. Karuṇānubhāvanibbāpiyamānasaṃsāradukkhasantāpassa hi bhagavato paradukkhāpanayanakāmatāya anekānipi asaṅkheyyāni kappānaṃ akilantarūpasseva niravasesabuddhakaradhammasambharaṇaniyatassa samadhigatadhammādhipateyyassa ca sannihitesupi sattasaṅkhārasamupanītahadayūpatāpanimittesu na īsakampi cittasītībhāvassaññathattamahosīti. Etasmiñca atthavikappe tīsupi avatthāsu bhagavato karuṇā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
已对照篇首

[它能]了知,故为「慧(paññā)」,义即以种种方式如自性而通达。慧本身由于断除所知障(ñeyyāvaraṇa),以种种方式照明诸法自性之义,[故]即是「灯(pajjota)」,[故为]「慧灯」。由于是连同习气而断(savāsanappahāna),[故]被格外地破除、拔除,[即]「破除(vihata)」。以慧灯而被破除[即]「以慧灯破除」。[人们]以它而迷,或它自身迷,或那[法]唯是迷本身,故为「痴(moha)」,即无明。也正是它,由于遮蔽境之自性,与黑暗相似,犹如暗,故为「暗(tamo)」。他有那以慧灯所破除的痴暗,故为「以慧灯破除了痴暗者」;[礼敬]那「以慧灯破除了痴暗者」。因为一切漏尽者虽然都以慧灯破除了无明之暗,然而正如见至者(diṭṭhippatta)[的烦恼断除]与依信而胜解者(saddhādhimutta)[的]有别,正等正觉者的烦恼断除也由于是连同习气而断,与诸声闻及诸独觉佛[的]有别;所以[阿阇梨]是以格外的断无明来称扬世尊,才说「以慧灯破除了痴暗」。

Pajānātīti paññā, yathāsabhāvaṃ pakārehi paṭivijjhatīti attho. Paññāva ñeyyāvaraṇappahānato pakārehi dhammasabhāvāvajotanaṭṭhena pajjototi paññāpajjoto, savāsanappahānato visesena hataṃ samugghāṭitaṃ vihataṃ, paññāpajjotena vihataṃ paññāpajjotavihataṃ. Muyhanti tena, sayaṃ vā muyhati, mohanamattameva vā tanti moho, avijjā, sveva visayasabhāvapaṭicchādanato andhakārasarikkhatāya tamo viyāti tamo, paññāpajjotavihato mohatamo etassāti paññāpajjotavihatamohatamo, taṃ paññāpajjotavihatamohatamaṃ. Sabbesampi hi khīṇāsavānaṃ satipi paññāpajjotena avijjāndhakārassa vihatabhāve saddhādhimuttehi viya diṭṭhippattānaṃ sāvakehi, paccekasambuddhehi ca savāsanappahānena sammāsambuddhānaṃ kilesappahānassa viseso vijjatīti sātisayena avijjāppahānena bhagavantaṃ thomento āha ‘‘paññāpajjotavihatamohatama’’nti.
缅 1.4已对照篇首

或者,由于不藉他人之教导而于自己的相续中令无明之暗毕竟离去,又由于已于其中证得一切知性与于诸力的自在之性,并且由于以殊胜说法之威力而于他人的相续中正正当当地令那[离暗]转起,[故]唯世尊应特别以痴暗之离去而受赞叹——[故阿阇梨]说「以慧灯破除了痴暗」。 而于这一义之分别中,应知以「慧灯」一句,世尊的通达慧与说法慧一样,都依总说、或依「余一(ekasesa)」之法而被摄取。

Atha vā antarena paropadesaṃ attano santāne accantaṃ avijjāndhakāravigamassa nibbattitattā, tattha ca sabbaññutāya, balesu ca vasībhāvassa samadhigatattā, parasantatiyañca dhammadesanātisayānubhāvena sammadeva tassa pavattitattā bhagavāva visesato mohatamavigamena thometabboti āha ‘‘paññāpajjotavihatamohatama’’nti. Imasmiñca atthavikappe ‘‘paññāpajjoto’’ti padena bhagavato paṭivedhapaññā viya desanāpaññāpi sāmaññaniddesena ekasesanayena vā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
PTS 1.5已对照篇首

或者,由于世尊之智以所知为边际,[故]以那能觉了一切所知法自性的、称为无障碍智(anāvaraṇañāṇa)的慧灯,覆蔽一切所知法自性的痴暗已被摧破;[阿阇梨]以「世尊的痴暗之坏灭是不共他者的」[这一意思]而说了「以慧灯破除了痴暗」。 而此中应知:由于无障碍智是在痴暗被摧破之后所证得的,[故]依因之假说,[它]于自相续中[即是]痴暗的摧破。 因为由发愿(abhinīhāra)的成就,诸烦恼的「连同习气而断」本身即是「所知障的断除」;而于他人的相续中,由于[它]是痴暗摧破之因,[故]无障碍智[也]被说为「痴暗的摧破」。

Atha vā bhagavato ñāṇassa ñeyyapariyantikattā sakalañeyyadhammasabhāvābodhanasamatthena anāvaraṇañāṇasaṅkhātena paññāpajjotena sabbañeyyadhammasabhāvacchādakassa mohandhakārassa vidhamitattā anaññasādhāraṇo bhagavato mohatamavināsoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘paññāpajjotavihatamohatama’’nti. Ettha ca mohatamavidhamanante adhigatattā anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ kāraṇūpacārena sakasantāne mohatamavidhamanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Abhinīhārasampattiyā savāsanappahānameva hi kilesānaṃ ‘‘ñeyyāvaraṇappahāna’’nti, parasantāne pana mohatamavidhamanassa kāraṇabhāvato anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ ‘‘mohatamavidhamana’’nti vuccatīti.
已对照篇首

[设难:]那么是什么缘故,唯取无明的破除这一项作为依断之成就而赞叹世尊的因相,而不[取]那殊胜的、无有余剩的断烦恼呢?——[通释:]因为以说那[无明]之断,由于[诸烦恼]与它同一依处,一切杂染之聚的根除便已被照明了。因为并没有那样一种烦恼,是不因无余地断无明而被断的。 或者,正如明是一切善法生起[的主因],无明也是一切不善法生起与轮回转起的主因;故以说它的破除,一切杂染之聚的根除便已被说到了——[故]说「以慧灯破除了痴暗」。

Kiṃ pana kāraṇaṃ avijjāvigghāto yeveko pahānasampattivasena bhagavato thomanānimittaṃ gayhati, na pana sātisayaniravasesakilesappahānanti? Tappahānavacaneneva tadekaṭṭhatāya sakalasaṃkilesagaṇasamugghātajotitabhāvato. Na hi so tādiso kileso atthi, yo niravasesaavijjāppahānena na pahīyatīti. Atha vā vijjā viya sakalakusaladhammasamuppattiyā niravasesākusaladhammanibbattiyā, saṃsārappavattiyā ca avijjā padhānakāraṇanti tabbigghātavacanena sakalasaṃkilesagaṇasamugghāto vuttoyeva hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘paññāpajjotavihatamohatama’’nti.
PTS 1.6缅 1.5已对照篇首

诸人与诸不死者[合称]「人与天(narāmara)」;「与人天俱」故为「含人天(sanarāmara)」;「含人天」而又是世间,故为「含人与天之世间」;是那[世间]的尊重者,故为「含人与天之世间的尊重者」;[礼敬]那位「含人与天之世间的尊重者」。 以此显示:正如对诸天与诸人,世尊对其余众生也随其所应带来殊胜功德,[故]有施恩之性。 而此处不应诘责主与非主之性。因为声的次第是一回事,义的次第是另一回事。因为在这样的复合词中,主者也如非主者那样被举示,如「含王之众(sarājikāya parisāya)」(《譬喻义注》1.82)。 此处世间固然依众生、诸行、器[世间]而有三种;然而由于所意指的是尊重之性,[而]唯能作尊重者才相应,[故]应依众生世间取义——因为诸福与诸恶及其异熟于其中被见,[故]它被称为「世间」。而此处以取「不死者」,所意指的是生天(upapattideva)[诸天]。

Narā ca amarā ca narāmarā, saha narāmarehīti sanarāmaro, sanarāmaro ca so loko cāti sanarāmaraloko, tassa garuti sanarāmaralokagaru, taṃ sanarāmaralokagaruṃ. Etena devamanussānaṃ viya tadavasiṭṭhasattānampi yathārahaṃ guṇavisesāvahato bhagavato upakāritaṃ dasseti. Na cettha padhānāpadhānabhāvo codetabbo. Añño hi saddakkamo, añño atthakkamo. Edisesu hi samāsapadesu padhānampi appadhānaṃ viya niddisīyati yathā – ‘‘sarājikāya parisāyā’’ti (apa. aṭṭha. 1.82). Kāmañcettha sattasaṅkhārabhājanavasena tividho loko, garubhāvassa pana adhippetattā garukaraṇasamatthasseva yujjanato sattalokassavasena attho gahetabbo. So hi lokiyanti ettha puññapāpāni tabbipāko cāti ‘‘loko’’ti vuccati. Amaraggahaṇena cettha upapattidevā adhippetā.
已对照篇首

或者,「世间(loka)」一语[取]聚之义——[即]依集聚而被见、被施设。与人俱,故为「含人的(sanarā)」;既是含人的、又是天,故为「含人之天(sanarāmarā)」;[彼是]他们的世间,故为「含人与天之世间」——应依前面的方式配合。而此中以「天(amara)」一语,清净天(visuddhideva)也被收摄了;因为他们由于无有死,就真实义而言[确是]「不死者」。[至于]唯取人与天,是依就胜者而说(ukkaṭṭhaniddesa),犹如「天与人之师」(《长部》1.157)那样。正因如此:由于[他具]以遣除一切无益为前导的、专致于安排无余的利益与安乐的、无上的行持之成就,由于[他]对连同诸天的人众毕竟有益,又由于[他]具足不可量度、无可比拟的威力与殊胜功德——世尊是一切众生中最上者,是无量世界界中无量众生的最上尊重之处。故说「含人与天之世间的尊重者」。

Atha vā samūhattho loka-saddo samudāyavasena lokīyati paññāpīyatīti. Saha narehīti sanarā, sanarā ca te amarā ceti sanarāmarā, tesaṃ lokoti sanarāmaralokoti purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Amara-saddena cettha visuddhidevāpi saṅgayhanti. Te hi maraṇābhāvato paramatthato amarā. Narāmarānaṃyeva ca gahaṇaṃ ukkaṭṭhaniddesavasena, yathā – ‘‘satthā devamanussāna’’nti (dī. ni. 1.157). Tathā hi sabbānatthapariharaṇapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya accantupakāritāya, aparimitanirupamappabhāvaguṇavisesasamaṅgitāya ca sabbasattuttamo bhagavā aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ uttamaṃ gāravaṭṭhānaṃ, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sanarāmaralokagaru’’nti.
PTS 1.7已对照篇首

他的所往、[即]行走是美好的,故为「善逝(sugata)」。因为世尊往趣所化之人,由于必定成办他们的利益与安乐,[故是]美好的;同样,由于[他的]色身以[大丈夫]相与随好(lakkhaṇānubyañjana)(《长部》2.33;3.198-200;《中部》2.385、386)所庄严,[他的]身之行走离于急速、迟缓、踬跌、拖行、重压、蹲行、歪斜、杂乱等诸过失,[如]优美的王鹅、牛王、龙象与兽王之行走;而[他的]智之行走,则以广大无垢的悲、念、精进等殊胜功德为伴,从发愿直至大菩提皆无可责难——[故]正是美好的。

Sobhanaṃ gataṃ gamanaṃ etassāti sugato. Bhagavato hi veneyyajanupasaṅkamanaṃ ekantena tesaṃ hitasukhanipphādanato sobhanaṃ, tathā lakkhaṇānubyañjana (dī. ni. 2.33; 3.198-200; ma. ni. 2.385, 386) paṭimaṇḍitarūpakāyatāyadutavilambita- khalitānukaḍḍhananippīḷanukkuṭikakuṭilākulatādidosarahitaṃ vilāsitarājahaṃsavasabhavāraṇamigarājagamanaṃ kāyagamanaṃ ñāṇagamanañca vipulanimmalakaruṇāsativīriyādiguṇavisesasahitamabhinīhārato yāva mahābodhi anavajjatāya sobhanamevāti.
缅 1.6已对照篇首

或者,以自生智(sayambhuñāṇa)依遍知现观而遍知整个世间,[如是]以智正行、[即]正觉了,故为「善逝」;同样,依断现观而断世间之集、令[它]成为不再生起之法,[如是]正行、[即]已越过,故为「善逝」;依作证现观[而行于]世间之灭、[即]涅槃,[如是]正行、[即]已证得,故为「善逝」;依修习现观[而行于]趣向世间之灭的行道,[如是]正行、[即]已行道,故为「善逝」。 此义应依「凡以须陀洹道所断的诸烦恼,他不再回到、不再返回、不再复来于那些烦恼,故为『善逝』」等之法而阐明。 或者,已行、[即]已证得美好之处、[即]正等正觉,或[即]涅槃,故为「善逝」。 或者,由于[他]所说的法是真实的、如实的、有义利的,并且对所化者随其所应而合于时的,所以「正说(sammā gadati)」,故为「善逝」——是把 da 音作成 ta 音[而成]。 如是,由行走美好之性等[义]而为「善逝」;[礼敬]那「善逝」。

Atha vā sayambhuñāṇena sakalampi lokaṃ pariññābhisamayavasena parijānanto ñāṇena sammā gato avagatoti sugato. Tathā lokasamudayaṃ pahānābhisamayavasena pajahanto anuppattidhammataṃ āpādento sammā gato atītoti sugato. Lokanirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena sammā gato adhigatoti sugato. Lokanirodhagāminipaṭipadaṃ bhāvanābhisamayavasena sammā gato paṭipannoti sugato. Sotāpattimaggena ye kilesā pahīnā, te kilese na puneti, na pacceti, na paccāgacchatīti sugatotiādinā nayena ayamattho vibhāvetabbo. Atha vā sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ sammāsambodhiṃ nibbānameva vā gato adhigatoti sugato. Yasmā vā bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasañhitaṃ vineyyānaṃ yathārahaṃ kālayuttameva ca dhammaṃ bhāsati, tasmā sammā gadatīti sugato, da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā. Iti sobhanagamanatādīhi sugato, taṃ sugataṃ.
已对照篇首

由诸福业与恶业依受生而应趣往,[故为]「诸趣(gatiyo)」,[即]生有的差别;而它们依地狱等而有五种。由于以证得圣道使一切趣有之业成为不应有异熟,[从而]已从那些[趣]退转,[故]世尊善解脱于五趣、已离系;[故阿阇梨]说「已解脱诸趣的」。 以此显示世尊不摄属于任何一趣,由此世尊被称为「天中天(devātideva)」。正因如此说——

Puññapāpakammehi upapajjanavasena gantabbato gatiyo, upapattibhavavisesā. Tā pana nirayādivasena pañcavidhā, tāhi sakalassāpi bhavagāmikammassa ariyamaggādhigamena avipākārahabhāvakaraṇena nivattitattā bhagavā pañcahipi gatīhi suṭṭhu mutto visaṃyuttoti āha – ‘‘gativimutta’’nti. Etena bhagavato katthacipi gatiyā apariyāpannataṃ dasseti, yato bhagavā ‘‘devātidevo’’ti vuccati, tenevāha –
已对照篇首

「由于它[我]将生为天, 或[生为]空行的乾闼婆;

‘‘Yena devūpapatyassa, gandhabbo vā vihaṅgamo;
已对照篇首

由于它[我]将趣往夜叉之性, 或来至人之性——

Yakkhattaṃ yena gaccheyyaṃ, manussattañca abbaje;
已对照篇首

我的那些漏已尽, 已摧毁、已除根。」(《增支部》4.36)

Te mayhaṃ āsavā khīṇā, viddhastā vinaḷīkatā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.36);
PTS 1.8已对照篇首

因为能招致各各趣的业与烦恼,[世尊]已以最上道就在菩提树下善为断除,所以世尊不摄属于诸趣;[故]世尊从一切有、生、趣、识住、众生居与众生类中毕竟善为解脱。[礼敬]那「已解脱诸趣」[者]。「我礼敬(vande)」者:义即我敬礼,或我称扬。

Taṃtaṃgatisaṃvattanakānañhi kammakilesānaṃ aggamaggena bodhimūleyeva suppahīnattā natthi bhagavato gatipariyāpannatāti accantameva bhagavā sabbabhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsasattanikāyehi suparimutto, taṃ gativimuttaṃ. Vandeti namāmi, thomemīti vā attho.
缅 1.7已对照篇首

或者,「已解脱诸趣的」是以无余依涅槃界之证得赞叹世尊。因为此中应知世尊的赞叹有二种行相:依自利之成就与依利他之行道。其中,自利之成就应依证得无障碍智、毕竟断除一切连同习气的烦恼、及证得无余依涅槃而知;利他之行道[则应依]:以不顾利养、恭敬等之心而说出离一切苦之法,纵对相违者也常有利益之意乐,又[待所化者]智成熟之时而来[教化]。 而此中,利他之行道依意乐与加行有二种,自利之成就有三种,[如是]被显示出来。如何[显示]呢?——以「[他]心因悲而清凉」[显示]依意乐的利他之行道;以「正说」义的「善逝」一语[显示]依加行的利他之行道;以「以慧灯破除了痴暗」「已解脱诸趣的」这[二句]与「通达四谛」义的「善逝」一语[显示]三种自利之成就;又以其余[之语]及「以慧灯破除了痴暗」这[一句],则一切自利之成就与利他之行道都被显示了。

Atha vā gativimuttanti anupādisesanibbānadhātuppattiyā bhagavantaṃ thometi. Ettha hi dvīhākārehi bhagavato thomanā veditabbā – attahitasampattito, parahitapaṭipattito ca. Tesu attahitasampatti anāvaraṇañāṇādhigamato, savāsanānaṃ sabbesaṃ kilesānaṃ accantappahānato, anupādisesanibbānappattito ca veditabbā. Parahitapaṭipatti lābhasakkārādinirapekkhacittassa sabbadukkhaniyyānikadhammadesanāto, viruddhesupi niccaṃ hitajjhāsayato, ñāṇaparipākakālāgamanato ca. Sā panettha āsayato payogato ca duvidhā parahitapaṭipatti, tividhā ca attahitasampatti pakāsitā hoti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Karuṇāsītalahadaya’’nti etena āsayato parahitapaṭipatti, sammā gadanatthena sugata-saddena payogato parahitapaṭipatti, ‘‘paññāpajjotavihatamohatamaṃ gativimutta’’nti etehi catusaccapaṭivedhatthena ca sugata-saddena tividhāpi attahitasampatti, avasiṭṭhena, ‘‘paññāpajjotavihatamohatama’’nti etena ca sabbāpi attahitasampattiparahitapaṭipatti pakāsitā hotīti.
PTS 1.9已对照篇首

或者,应知世尊的赞叹有三种行相——依因、依果、依施恩。此中,因是大悲,它以第一句显示。果有四种:智成就、断成就、威力成就、色身成就。其中,智成就与断成就以第二句及「通达[四]谛」义的「善逝」一语显示;威力成就以第三句,色身成就以如上所说「身之行善美」义的「善逝」一语[显示]——因为若无[三十二]相与[八十]随好的圆满(《长部》2.33;3.198-200;《中部》2.385-386),便无那[身行之善美]。 施恩,[即]对[众生]作内人、不作外人,以三乘之门[而作]的解脱法之教说;应知它以「正说」义的「善逝」一语显示。

Atha vā tīhākārehi bhagavato thomanā veditabbā – hetuto, phalato, upakārato ca. Tattha hetu mahākaruṇā, sā paṭhamapadena nidassitā. Phalaṃ catubbidhaṃ – ñāṇasampadā, pahānasampadā, ānubhāvasampadā, rūpakāyasampadā cāti. Tāsu ñāṇappahānasampadā dutiyapadena saccappaṭivedhatthena ca sugata-saddena pakāsitā honti. Ānubhāvasampadā tatiyapadena, rūpakāyasampadā yathāvuttakāyagamanasobhanatthena sugata-saddena, lakkhaṇānubyañjanapāripūriyā (dī. ni. 2.33; 3.198-200; ma. ni. 2.385-386) vinā tadabhāvato. Upakāro antaraṃ abāhiraṃ karitvā tividhayānamukhena vimuttidhammadesanā, so sammā gadanatthena sugata-saddena pakāsito hotīti veditabbaṃ.
缅 1.8已对照篇首

此中,以「[他]心因悲而清凉」显示正等正觉之根本。因为世尊意为大悲所激发,为把众生从轮回的泥沼中救出而作了发愿,次第圆满诸波罗蜜(pāramī),[而后]证得无上正等正觉;故悲是正等正觉之根本。 以「以慧灯破除了痴暗」显示正等正觉。因为以无障碍智为足处的道智,与以道智为足处的无障碍智,[二者]被称为「正等正觉」。 以「正说」义的「善逝」一语显示正等正觉之行道——因为「善逝」一语显示的是那离于退缩与掉举、住立与勤勇、欲乐耽溺与自苦行、常见与断见之执取等二边的、为悲与慧所摄持的中道。 以其余[诸句]显示正等正觉的主与非主之别的目的。因为此中把众生从轮回的大暴流中度脱是主要目的,其余的是非主要的。其中以主要[目的]显示利他之行道,以另一[目的显示]自利之成就;以那二者显示:于「为自利而行道者」等(《人施设论》24、173)四种人中,世尊是第四种人。又以此显示[世尊]是无上应施者之性、最上应礼敬者之性,以及他对自己的礼敬之业而言是田之所归。

Tattha ‘‘karuṇāsītalahadaya’’nti etena sammāsambodhiyā mūlaṃ dasseti. Mahākaruṇāsañcoditamānaso hi bhagavā saṃsārapaṅkato sattānaṃ samuddharaṇatthaṃ katābhinīhāro anupubbena pāramiyo pūretvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ adhigatoti karuṇā sammāsambodhiyā mūlaṃ. ‘‘Paññāpajjotavihatamohatama’’nti etena sammāsambodhiṃ dasseti. Anāvaraṇañāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi maggañāṇaṃ, maggañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ ‘‘sammāsambodhī’’ti vuccatīti. Sammā gadanatthena sugata-saddena sammāsambodhiyā paṭipattiṃ dasseti, līnuddhaccapatiṭṭhānāyūhanakāmasukhallikattakilamathānuyoga- sassatucchedābhinivesādiantadvayarahitāya karuṇāpaññāpariggahitāya majjhimāya paṭipattiyā pakāsanato sugata-saddassa. Itarehi sammāsambodhiyā padhānāppadhānabhedaṃ payojanaṃ dasseti. Saṃsāramahoghato sattasantāraṇañcettha padhānaṃ payojanaṃ, tadaññamappadhānaṃ. Tesu padhānena parahitappaṭipattiṃ dasseti, itarena attahitasampattiṃ, tadubhayena attahitāya paṭipannādīsu (pu. pa. 24, 173) catūsu puggalesu bhagavato catutthapuggalabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tena ca anuttaradakkhiṇeyyabhāvaṃ uttamavandanīyabhāvaṃ, attano ca vandanakiriyāya khettaṅgatabhāvaṃ dasseti.
PTS 1.10已对照篇首

而此中,以取「悲」,由于阐明诸世间[法]中达于广大之性的不共功德,[故]世尊的一切世间功德之成就被显示;以取「慧」,由于阐明以一切知智为足处的道智,[故显示]一切出世间功德之成就——因为由取那二者所成之义,以「含人与天之世间的尊重者」等语而得开演。 又以取「悲」显示无有随烦恼的趣近,以取「慧」[显示]远离。 同样,以取「悲」显示世尊随顺世间通称的转起——因为悲以世间言说为境;以取「慧」[显示]不超越通称——因为由不觉了诸法的自性,才有超越通称而执取众生等[之事]。 同样,以取「悲」显示大悲等至住,以取「慧」[显示]于三时无有障碍之智、四谛智、四无碍解智、四无畏智。 由于以取「悲」已取了大悲等至智,[故以取「慧」]依其余诸不共智、六神通、于八众中(《中部》1.151)的不动智、十力、十四佛智、十六智行、十八佛法(《长部义注》3.305;《分别论根本复注》〈序论释义〉)、四十四智事(《相应部》2.34)、七十七智事(《相应部》2.34)等等众多慧之差别,显示智之行。

Ettha ca karuṇāggahaṇena lokiyesu mahaggatabhāvappattāsādhāraṇaguṇadīpanato bhagavato sabbalokiyaguṇasampatti dassitā hoti, paññāggahaṇena sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānamaggañāṇadīpanato sabbalokuttaraguṇasampatti. Tadubhayaggahaṇasiddho hi attho ‘‘sanarāmaralokagaru’’ntiādinā vipañcīyatīti. Karuṇāggahaṇena ca upagamanaṃ nirupakkilesaṃ dasseti, paññāggahaṇena apagamanaṃ. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena lokasamaññānurūpaṃ bhagavato pavattiṃ dasseti, lokavohāravisayattā karuṇāya, paññāggahaṇena samaññāyānavidhāvanaṃ. Sabhāvānavabodhena hi dhammānaṃ samaññaṃ atidhāvitvā sattādiparāmasanaṃ hotīti. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena mahākaruṇāsamāpattivihāraṃ dasseti, paññāggahaṇena tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇaṃ, catusaccañāṇaṃ, catuppaṭisambhidāñāṇaṃ, catuvessārajjañāṇaṃ. Karuṇāggahaṇena mahākaruṇāsamāpattiñāṇassa gahitattā sesāsādhāraṇañāṇāni, cha abhiññā, aṭṭhasu parisāsu (ma. ni. 1.151) akampanañāṇāni, dasa balāni, cuddasa buddhañāṇāni, soḷasa ñāṇacariyā, aṭṭhārasa buddhadhammā, (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.305; vibha. mūla. ṭī. ganthārambhavaṇṇanāya) catucattārīsa ñāṇavatthūni, (saṃ. ni. 2.34) sattasattati ñāṇavatthūnīti (saṃ. ni. 2.34) evamādīnaṃ anekesaṃ paññāppabhedānaṃ vasena ñāṇacāraṃ dasseti.
PTS 1.11缅 1.9已对照篇首

同样,以取「悲」[显示]行成就,以取「慧」[显示]明成就。以取「悲」[显示]众生增上性,以取「慧」[显示]法增上性。以取「悲」[显示]世间依怙之性,以取「慧」[显示]自依怙之性。同样,以取「悲」[显示]先施恩之性,以取「慧」[显示]知恩。同样,以取「悲」[显示]不苦他之性,以取「慧」[显示]不自苦之性。或者以取「悲」[显示]诸佛所作之法的成就,以取「慧」[显示]佛的境界之成就。同样,以取「悲」[显示]度脱他人,以取「慧」[显示]自度。同样,以取「悲」[显示]于一切众生有摄益之心,以取「慧」[显示]于一切法有离贪之心。 而于一切佛德,悲是初——由于[它们]以它为因缘;慧是终——由于在它之上无有应作。如是,由显示初与终,一切佛德便都被显示了。 同样,以取「悲」,[则]以戒蕴为先行的定蕴被显示。因为戒以悲为因缘——由从它而有离杀生等之转起;而它[悲]又与三禅相应。以「慧」一语[显示]慧蕴。 又戒是一切佛德之初,定在中,慧是终;如是,初、中、后[皆]善美的一切佛德也都被显示了——因为[它们]是依法门而被显示的。因为唯此——即取法门——才是无余显示佛德的方便;否则,有谁能够逐句无余地显示世尊的诸功德呢?正因如此说——

Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena caraṇasampattiṃ, paññāggahaṇena vijjāsampattiṃ. Karuṇāggahaṇena sattādhipatitā, paññāggahaṇena dhammādhipatitā. Karuṇāggahaṇena lokanāthabhāvo, paññāggahaṇena attanāthabhāvo. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena pubbakāribhāvo, paññāggahaṇena kataññutā. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena aparantapatā, paññāggahaṇena anattantapatā. Karuṇāggahaṇena vā buddhakaradhammasiddhi, paññāggahaṇena buddhabhāvasiddhi. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena paresaṃ tāraṇaṃ, paññāggahaṇena sayaṃ tāraṇaṃ. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena sabbasattesu anuggahacittatā, paññāggahaṇena sabbadhammesu virattacittatā dassitā hoti. Sabbesañca buddhaguṇānaṃ karuṇā ādi, tannidānabhāvato. Paññā pariyosānaṃ, tato uttarikaraṇīyābhāvato. Iti ādipariyosānadassanena sabbe buddhaguṇā dassitā honti. Tathā karuṇāggahaṇena sīlakkhandhapubbaṅgamo samādhikkhandho dassito hoti. Karuṇānidānañhi sīlaṃ, tato pāṇātipātādiviratippavattito, sā ca jhānattayasampayoginīti. Paññāvacanena paññākkhandho. Sīlañca sabbabuddhaguṇānamādi, samādhi majjhe, paññā pariyosānanti. Evampi ādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇā sabbe buddhaguṇā dassitā honti, nayato dassitattā. Eso eva hi niravasesato buddhaguṇānaṃ dassanupāyo, yadidaṃ nayaggāhaṇaṃ. Aññathā ko nāma samattho bhagavato guṇe anupadaṃ niravasesato dassetuṃ. Tenevāha –
已对照篇首

「纵然佛陀说佛陀的称赞;

‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ,
已对照篇首

纵然不说其他而[说]一劫,

Kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno;
已对照篇首

劫或在长久之间灭尽;

Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare,
已对照篇首

「如来的称赞[却]不会灭尽。」(《长部义注》1.304;3.141;《中部义注》3.425;《自说义注》53;《佛种姓义注》4.4;《所行藏义注·因缘论、杂论》;《譬喻义注》2.6.20)

Vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatassā’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.304; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.141; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.425, udā. aṭṭha. 53; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 4.4; cariyā. aṭṭha. nidānakathāyaṃ, pakiṇṇakakathāyaṃ; apa. aṭṭha. 2.6.20);
已对照篇首

正因如此,具寿舍利弗(Sāriputta)长老被就佛德之限定而追问时,也先以「尊者,这不然」(《长部》2.145)而否定,[然后]说「然而,尊者,我了知法的类推(dhammanvaya)」(《长部》2.146)。

Teneva ca āyasmatā sāriputtattherenāpi buddhaguṇaparicchedanaṃ pati anuyuttena ‘‘no hetaṃ bhante’’ti (dī. ni. 2.145) paṭikkhipitvā, ‘‘api ca me bhante dhammanvayo vidito’’ti (dī. ni. 2.146) vuttaṃ.
PTS 1.12缅 1.10已对照篇首

如是以一切知者的全部功德略赞世尊之后,如今为赞叹正法而说了「佛陀也是」等语。 此中,「佛陀」是作者之举示;「佛的境界」是业之举示;「修习了」「现证了」是前时动作之举示;「凡」是不限定的业之举示;「趣得」是后时动作之举示;「[我]礼敬」是动作之举示;「那」是限定;「法」是礼敬之业的举示;而「离垢的」「无上的」是它的限定语。

Evaṃ saṅkhepena sakalasabbaññuguṇehi bhagavantaṃ abhitthavitvā idāni saddhammaṃ thometuṃ ‘‘buddhopī’’tiādimāha. Tattha buddhoti kattuniddeso. Buddhabhāvanti kammaniddeso. Bhāvetvā, sacchikatvāti ca pubbakālakiriyāniddeso. Yanti aniyamato kammaniddeso. Upagatoti aparakālakiriyāniddeso. Vandeti kiriyāniddeso, tanti niyamanaṃ. Dhammanti vandanakiriyāya kammaniddeso. Gatamalaṃ, anuttaranti ca tabbisesanaṃ.
已对照篇首

此中,「佛陀」一语之义应先依「觉了诸谛故为佛陀,令众生觉悟故为佛陀」等《义释》之法(《大义释》192;《小义释》95-97;《无碍解道》1.162)而知。 或者,由于连同习气的无智之睡眠毕竟离去,或由于觉慧已开敷,[故]「已觉(buddhavā)」故为「佛陀」——是依醒觉与开敷之义[而言]。 或者,由于没有任何未被觉了的所知法,[故]不以业之性取某一特定的所知;由于没有说业[语]的意欲,唯依觉了之义而得作者之举示,[故]「已觉」故为「佛陀」——如「受灌顶者不施」[之例]。 而依义,「佛陀」[即]那为诸波罗蜜所熏修的、以自生智连同习气破除摧毁了无余烦恼的、作为大悲与一切知智等不可计量功德之聚的所依的蕴相续。如所说——

Tattha buddha-saddassa tāva ‘‘bujjhitā saccānīti buddho, bodhetā pajāyāti buddho’’tiādinā (mahāni. 192; cūḷani. 95-97; paṭi. ma. 1.162) niddesanayena attho veditabbo. Atha vā savāsanāya aññāṇaniddāya accantavigamato, buddhiyā vā vikasitabhāvato buddhavāti buddho, jāgaraṇavikasanatthavasena. Atha vā kassacipi ñeyyadhammassa anavabuddhassa abhāvena ñeyyavisesassa kammabhāvena aggahaṇato kammavacanicchāya abhāvena avagamanatthavaseneva kattuniddeso labbhatīti buddhavāti buddho, yathā ‘‘dikkhito na dadātī’’ti, atthato pana pāramitāparibhāvito sayambhūñāṇena saha vāsanāya vihataviddhastaniravasesakileso mahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādiaparimeyya guṇagaṇādhāro khandhasantāno buddho. Yathāha –
已对照篇首

「『佛陀』者:那位世尊是自生者(sayambhū)、无阿阇梨者,于先前未曾听闻的诸法中自己现观了诸谛,并于其中证得一切知性与于诸力的自在之性。」(《大义释》192;《小义释》95-97;《无碍解道》1.162)

‘‘Buddhoti yo so bhagavā sayambhū anācariyako pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu sāmaṃ saccāni abhisambujjhi, tattha ca sabbaññutaṃ patto, balesu ca vasībhāva’’nti (mahāni. 192; cūḷani. 95-97; paṭi. ma. 1.162).
PTS 1.13已对照篇首

「也(api)」一语是于推重;以它阐明对所将说之有德的法的推重——[意谓]「连那位具足如是殊胜功德的世尊也[尚须如此]」。 「佛的境界」者:即正等正觉。「修习了」者:即令生起、并令增长。「现证了」者:即作为现量。「趣得」者:即已达,义即已证得;它与「佛的境界」相关联。「离垢的」者:即垢已离去,义即无过失。「[我]礼敬」者:即我敬礼,或我赞叹。「无上的」者:即无有更上者,义即出世间。「法」者:使如所教导而行道者不堕于恶趣与轮回而执持之,故为「法(dhamma)」。

Api-saddo sambhāvane, tena ‘‘evaṃ guṇavisesayutto sopi nāma bhagavā’’ti vakkhamānaguṇe dhamme sambhāvanaṃ dīpeti. Buddhabhāvanti sammāsambodhiṃ. Bhāvetvāti uppādetvā, vaḍḍhetvā ca. Sacchikatvāti paccakkhaṃ katvā. Upagatoti patto, adhigatoti attho, etassa ‘‘buddhabhāva’’nti etena sambandho. Gatamalanti vigatamalaṃ, niddosanti attho. Vandeti paṇamāmi, thomemi vā. Anuttaranti uttararahitaṃ, lokuttaranti attho. Dhammanti yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne apāyato ca, saṃsārato ca apatamāne katvā dhārayatīti dhammo.
缅 1.11已对照篇首

而此中略义如是——如是具足种种功德的佛陀世尊,修习了那称为圣[道]的法、又现证了那称为果与涅槃的[法],[从而]证得了无上正等正觉;我敬礼那一法——[它]连对诸佛也是佛的境界之因,离于一切过失与垢,由于没有比自己更上者而为无上——[即]通达正法。应知此处也摄取了教理正法,因为[它]是那[通达正法]的显示者。 或者,由于义注中说了「[他]修习了阿毗达摩法门之海而证得[它],触察了三藏」,故教理法也可得「现证」与「触察」的说法;应知它[教理法]于此处也确已被说到。 同样,由于说了「修习了、现证了那法」,应知连同那作为诸佛所作之法的诸波罗蜜,前分的增上戒学等也于此处被「法」一语摄取——因为它们也由于[所]对治已离去而「离垢」,由不共他者而「无上」。 正因如此:世尊为使众生出离一切轮转之苦而作了大发愿,[其]意乐以大悲之安住而柔善;以恭敬、无间地修习并现证那些为殊胜之慧所遍净而无垢的、布施、调伏、律仪等最上之法——[历时]十万[劫]以上的四阿僧祇劫,无有余剩——[从而]于业等证得自在之性,[其]大威力希奇难思,于增上戒与增上心达到了最极的波罗蜜;[如是]于缘之行相以二十四俱胝十万之门运转大金刚智,现观了无上正等正觉。

Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – evaṃ vividhaguṇasamannāgato buddhopi bhagavā yaṃ ariyasaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvetvā, phalanibbānasaṅkhātaṃ pana sacchikatvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ adhigato, tametaṃ buddhānampi buddhabhāvahetubhūtaṃ sabbadosamalarahitaṃ attano uttaritarābhāvena anuttaraṃ paṭivedhasaddhammaṃ namāmīti. Pariyattisaddhammassāpi tappakāsanattā idha saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā ‘‘abhidhammanayasamuddaṃ bhāvetvā adhigacchi, tīṇi piṭakāni sammasī’’ti ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā pariyattidhammassāpi sacchikiriyāsammasanapariyāyo labbhatīti sopi idha vutto yevāti daṭṭhabbo. Tathā ‘‘yaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvetvā, sacchikatvā’’ti ca vuttattā buddhakaradhammabhūtāhi pāramitāhi saha pubbabhāge adhisīlasikkhādayopi idha dhamma-saddena saṅgahitāti veditabbā. Tāpi hi vigatapaṭipakkhatāya vigatamalā, anaññasādhāraṇatāya anuttarā cāti. Tathā hi sattānaṃ sakalavaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇāya katamahābhinīhāro mahākaruṇādhivāsapesalajjhāsayo paññāvisesapariyodātanimmalānaṃ dānadamasaññamādīnaṃ uttamadhammānaṃ satasahassādhikāni kappānaṃ cattāri asaṅkheyyāni sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ niravasesaṃ bhāvanāpaccakkhakaraṇehi kammādīsu adhigatavasībhāvo, acchariyācinteyyamahānubhāvo, adhisīlaadhicittānaṃ paramukkaṃsapāramippatto bhagavā paccayākāre catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassamukhena mahāvajirañāṇaṃ pesetvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti.
PTS 1.14已对照篇首

而此中,以「修习了」是依明成就赞叹法,以「现证了」是依解脱(vimutti)成就[赞叹]。同样,以第一[语]依禅成就,以第二[语]依解脱(vimokkha)成就。或者以第一[语]依定成就,以第二[语]依等至成就。 或者以第一[语]依尽智之性,以第二[语]依不生智之性。或者以前[语]依如电之性,以第二[语]依如金刚之性。或者以前[语]依离贪成就,以第二[语]依灭成就。同样,以第一[语]依出离(niyyāna)之性,以第二[语]依出脱(nissaraṇa)之性。或者以第一[语]依因之性,以第二[语]依无为之性。或者以第一[语]依见之性,以第二[语]依离之性。或者以第一[语]依增上之性,以第二[语]依不死之性赞叹法。 或者,以「修习了那法而趣得佛的境界」是依善说之性赞叹法;以「现证了」[则依]现见之性。同样,以前[语]依无时之性,以后[语]依来见之性。或者以前[语]依引导之性,以后[语]依各自应证知之性赞叹法。

Ettha ca ‘‘bhāvetvā’’ti etena vijjāsampadāya dhammaṃ thometi, ‘sacchikatvā’ti etena vimuttisampadāya. Tathā paṭhamena jhānasampadāya, dutiyena vimokkhasampadāya. Paṭhamena vā samādhisampadāya, dutiyena samāpattisampadāya. Atha vā paṭhamena khayañāṇabhāvena, dutiyena anuppādañāṇabhāvena. Purimena vā vijjūpamatāya, dutiyena vajirūpamatāya. Purimena vā virāgasampattiyā, dutiyena nirodhasampattiyā. Tathā paṭhamena niyyānabhāvena, dutiyena nissaraṇabhāvena. Paṭhamena vā hetubhāvena, dutiyena asaṅkhatabhāvena. Paṭhamena vā dassanabhāvena, dutiyena vivekabhāvena. Paṭhamena vā adhipatibhāvena, dutiyena amatabhāvena dhammaṃ thometi. Atha vā ‘‘yaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvetvā buddhabhāvaṃ upagato’’ti etena svākkhātatāya dhammaṃ thometi, ‘‘sacchikatvā’’ti etena sandiṭṭhikatāya. Tathā purimena akālikatāya, pacchimena ehipassikatāya. Purimena vā opaneyyikatāya, pacchimena paccattaṃ veditabbatāya dhammaṃ thometi.
缅 1.12已对照篇首

以「离垢的」,由阐明无有杂染而显示法的遍净性;以「无上的」,由阐明无有其他更殊胜者而[显示其]广大圆满性。或者以第一[语]显示法的断成就,以第二[语][显示]势力成就。 或者,法的「离垢」之性应就其应被修习[而言]来配合——因为由修习之德,它便是诸过失的根除者;「无上」之性应就其应被现证[而言]来配合——因为由现证之生起,在它之上无有应作,[且]不共他者,故为「无上」。 同样,以「修习了」,连同前分的戒等,有学的戒、定、慧三蕴被显示;以「现证了」,连同无为界,无学的戒、定、慧三蕴被显示。

‘‘Gatamala’’nti iminā saṃkilesābhāvadīpanena dhammassa parisuddhataṃ dasseti, ‘‘anuttara’’nti etena aññassa visiṭṭhassa abhāvadīpanena vipulaparipuṇṇataṃ. Paṭhamena vā pahānasampadaṃ dhammassa dasseti, dutiyena pabhāvasampadaṃ. Bhāvetabbatāya vā dhammassa gatamalabhāvo yojetabbo. Bhāvanāguṇena hi so dosānaṃ samugghātako hotīti. Sacchikātabbabhāvena anuttarabhāvo yojetabbo. Sacchikiriyānibbattito hi taduttarikaraṇīyābhāvato anaññasādhāraṇatāya anuttaroti. Tathā ‘‘bhāvetvā’’ti etena saha pubbabhāgasīlādīhi sekkhā sīlasamādhipaññākkhandhā dassitā honti, ‘‘sacchikatvā’’ti etena saha asaṅkhatāya dhātuyā asekkhā sīlasamādhipaññākkhandhā dassitā hontīti.
PTS 1.15已对照篇首

如是以法的一切功德略赞正法之后,如今为赞叹圣僧团而说了「善逝的」等语。 此中,「善逝的」是关联之举示,它与「诸子」相关联。「诸胸生[之子]」是「诸子」的限定语。「破魔军者」是胸生子之性的因之举示;以此显示:[阿阇梨]承认唯断烦恼才是[成为]世尊胸生子之性的因。「八[辈]」是算数限定之举示;以此显示:纵然他们依众生之差别有数十万之数,[却]不超越这一算数限定——因为[他们]不超越住道者与住果者之性。「聚」是总集之举示。「圣僧团」是德殊胜之和合体性的举示;以此显示:纵然诸圣人不集于[同一]众中,[其]身之和合[仍]有圣僧团之性——因为[他们]由见与戒的共同而结合。 此中,在胸中有、[即]生、且长养者,为「诸胸生[之子]」。正如众生的胸生子由自己所生,特别地成为父亲所有之遗产的分受者;同样,那些圣人也由于在闻正等正觉者[之法]的末后以圣生而生,[故]必定成为世尊所有之解脱乐与圣法之宝的分受者——[故]如胸生子而为「诸胸生[之子]」。 或者,那些由世尊说法之威力而正入与已入圣地的圣弟子,由于[其]高贵之生是由世尊的胸之精勤所生,[故]不依引申义即应被称为「胸生子」。因为纵由诸弟子所转起的说法,也正被称为「世尊的说法」——由于以他为根本,且无有相等的差别。

Evaṃ saṅkhepeneva sabbadhammaguṇehi saddhammaṃ abhitthavitvā, idāni ariyasaṅghaṃ thometuṃ ‘‘sugatassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sugatassāti sambandhaniddeso, tassa ‘‘puttāna’’nti etena sambandho. Orasānanti puttavisesanaṃ. Mārasenamathanānanti orasaputtabhāve kāraṇaniddeso, tena kilesappahānameva bhagavato orasaputtabhāvakāraṇaṃ anujānātīti dasseti. Aṭṭhannanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso, tena ca satipi tesaṃ sattavisesabhāvena anekasatasahassasaṅkhyabhāve imaṃ gaṇanaparicchedaṃ nātivattantīti dasseti, maggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhabhāvānativattanato. Samūhanti samudāyaniddeso. Ariyasaṅghanti guṇavisiṭṭhasaṅghātabhāvaniddeso, tena asatipi ariyapuggalānaṃ kāyasāmaggiyaṃ ariyasaṅghabhāvaṃ dasseti, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatabhāvato. Tattha urasi bhavā jātā, saṃvaddhā ca orasā. Yathā hi sattānaṃ orasaputtā attajātatāya pitusantakassa dāyajjassa visesena bhāgino honti, evametepi ariyapuggalā sammāsambuddhassa savanante ariyāya jātiyā jātatāya bhagavato santakassa vimuttisukhassa, ariyadhammaratanassa ca ekantabhāginoti orasā viya orasā. Atha vā bhagavato dhammadesanānubhāvena ariyabhūmiṃ okkamamānā, okkantā ca ariyasāvakā bhagavato urovāyāmajanitābhijātatāya nippariyāyena ‘‘orasaputtā’’ti vattabbataṃ arahanti. Sāvakehi pavattiyamānāpi hi dhammadesanā bhagavato ‘‘dhammadesanā’’ icceva vuccati, taṃmūlakattā, lakkhaṇādivisesābhāvato ca.
PTS 1.16缅 1.13已对照篇首

虽然在诸圣弟子证得圣道之时,天子魔或魔军并不像[对]世尊那样必定为作障碍而来扰逼;然而由于[烦恼这一]应被它们扰逼的因已被破除,那些[魔]也就名为已被破除——[故阿阇梨]说「破魔军者」。 而于此义中,本应说「破魔与魔军者」,[却]说「破魔军者」——应知这是作了「同一部分的余一(ekadesasarūpekaseso)」。 或者,正如蕴魔与行魔,天子魔也在杀害功德上趣得助伴之性;[故]烦恼的军力被称为「军」。如所说「诸欲是你的第一军」等(《经集》438;《大义释》28、68;《小义释》47)。而那有一千五百种差别、或无量差别的烦恼军,已被他们以念、择法、精进、止等功德之兵器分分地破除、击破、摧毁——[故]为「破魔军者」,[即]诸圣弟子。以此显示他们是世尊的随生子。

Yadipi ariyasāvakānaṃ ariyamaggādhigamasamaye bhagavato viya tadantarāyakaraṇatthaṃ devaputtamāro, māravāhinī vā na ekantena apasādeti, tehi pana apasādetabbatāya kāraṇe vimathite tepi vimathitā eva nāma hontīti āha – ‘‘mārasenamathanāna’’nti. Imasmiṃ panatthe ‘māramārasenamathanāna’nti vattabbe ‘‘mārasenamathanāna’’nti ekadesasarūpekaseso katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā khandhābhisaṅkhāramārānaṃ viya devaputtamārassāpi guṇamāraṇe sahāyabhāvūpagamanato kilesabalakāyo ‘‘senā’’ti vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘kāmā te paṭhamā senā’’tiādi (su. ni. 438; mahāni. 28, 68; cūḷani. 47). Sā ca tehi diyaḍḍhasahassabhedā, anantabhedā vā kilesavāhinī satidhammavicayavīriyasamathādiguṇapaharaṇehi odhiso vimathitā, vihatā, viddhastā cāti mārasenamathanā, ariyasāvakā. Etena tesaṃ bhagavato anujātaputtataṃ dasseti.
已对照篇首

依语源之法:由于远离诸烦恼,由于不行于非道,又由于行于道,[故为]「诸圣者(ariyā)」。 或者,由于为含天之世间当作「归依处」而应趣往、应亲近,且已亲近者[之]所求之义得成,[故为]「诸圣者」;是诸圣者的僧团,故为「圣僧团」;或者,是圣的而又是僧团,故为「圣僧团」;[礼敬]那「圣僧团」。 应知:在世尊[灭度]之后分,连佛宝与法宝的证得也依于僧宝;[故]为显示此圣僧团有多所助益,才唯在此处说了「我以头礼敬」。

Ārakattā kilesehi, anaye na iriyanato, aye ca iriyanato ariyā, niruttinayena. Atha vā sadevakena lokena ‘‘saraṇa’’nti araṇīyato upagantabbato, upagatānañca tadatthasiddhito ariyā, ariyānaṃ saṅghoti ariyasaṅgho, ariyo ca so, saṅgho cāti vā ariyasaṅgho, taṃ ariyasaṅghaṃ. Bhagavato aparabhāge buddhadhammaratanānampi samadhigamo saṅgharatanādhīnoti assa ariyasaṅghassa bahūpakārataṃ dassetuṃ idheva ‘‘sirasā vande’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
PTS 1.17缅 1.14已对照篇首

而此中,以「善逝的诸胸生之子」显示圣僧团的出处成就;以「破魔军者」[显示]断成就——由阐明断一切杂染;以「那八[辈]之聚」[显示]智成就——由阐明住道者与住果者之性;以「圣僧团」显示出处成就——由阐明[它]是一切僧团中的最上者。 或者,「善逝的诸胸生之子」是阐明圣僧团的清净所依之性;「破魔军者」是阐明[其]正行道、正直行道、如理行道、正当行道之性;「那八[辈]之聚」是阐明[其]应供养等之性;「圣僧团」是阐明[其]无上福田之性。 同样,以「善逝的诸胸生之子」阐明圣僧团有出世间归依之存在——因为由出世间归依,他们才生为世尊的胸生子。以「破魔军者」显示由发愿成就所成的、前分的正行道——因为已作发愿而正行道者,能战胜魔或魔众。以「那八[辈]之聚」显示那已摧毁对治品的有学与无学之法——因为[此处]是依人为所依而显示道法与果法。「圣僧团」显示[其]最上应施者之性。 而归依是诸弟子一切功德之初,连同前分行道的有学戒蕴等在中,无学戒蕴等是终;如是[以]初、中、后之善美,圣僧团的一切功德便略被显示了。

Ettha ca ‘‘sugatassa orasānaṃ puttāna’’nti etena ariyasaṅghassa pabhavasampadaṃ dasseti, ‘‘mārasenamathanāna’’nti etena pahānasampadaṃ, sakalasaṃkilesappahānadīpanato. ‘‘Aṭṭhannampi samūha’’nti etena ñāṇasampadaṃ, maggaṭṭhaphalaṭṭhabhāvadīpanato. ‘‘Ariyasaṅgha’’nti etena pabhavasampadaṃ dasseti, sabbasaṅghānaṃ aggabhāvadīpanato. Atha vā ‘‘sugatassa orasānaṃ puttāna’’nti ariyasaṅghassa visuddhanissayabhāvadīpanaṃ, ‘‘mārasenamathanāna’’nti sammāujuñāyasāmīcippaṭipannabhāvadīpanaṃ, ‘‘aṭṭhannampi samūha’’nti āhuneyyādibhāvadīpanaṃ, ‘‘ariyasaṅgha’’nti anuttarapuññakkhettabhāvadīpanaṃ. Tathā ‘‘sugatassa orasānaṃ puttāna’’nti etena ariyasaṅghassa lokuttarasaraṇagamanasabbhāvaṃ dīpeti. Lokuttarasaraṇagamanena hi te bhagavato orasaputtā jātā. ‘‘Mārasenamathanāna’’nti etena abhinīhārasampadāsiddhaṃ pubbabhāge sammāpaṭipattiṃ dasseti. Katābhinīhārā hi sammā paṭipannā māraṃ, māraparisaṃ vā abhivijinanti. ‘‘Aṭṭhannampi samūha’’nti etena viddhastavipakkhe sekkhāsekkhadhamme dasseti, puggalādhiṭṭhānena maggaphaladhammānaṃ pakāsitattā. ‘‘Ariyasaṅgha’’nti aggadakkhiṇeyyabhāvaṃ dasseti. Saraṇagamanañca sāvakānaṃ sabbaguṇānamādi, sapubbabhāgappaṭipadā sekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo majjhe, asekkhā sīlakkhandhādayo pariyosānanti ādimajjhapariyosānakalyāṇā saṅkhepato sabbe ariyasaṅghaguṇā pakāsitā honti.
已对照篇首

如是以三首偈、依略说一切功德之门作了三宝的敬礼之后,如今为把那敬礼之作回向于如所意指的目的,[阿阇梨]说了「如是,由我」等语。 此中,以能生喜之义为「宝(ratana)」,[即]佛、法、僧。因为以「彼世尊亦即是[阿罗汉]」等[语]忆念他们如实之德者,[心中]生起不少的、作为证得不死之因的喜与欢悦。如所说——

Evaṃ gāthāttayena saṅkhepato sakalaguṇasaṅkittanamukhena ratanattayassa paṇāmaṃ katvā, idāni taṃ nipaccakāraṃ yathādhippete payojane pariṇāmento ‘‘iti me’’tiādimāha. Tattha ratijananaṭṭhena ratanaṃ, buddhadhammasaṅghā. Tesañhi ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā yathābhūtaguṇe āvajjantassa amatādhigamahetubhūtaṃ anappakaṃ pītipāmojjaṃ uppajjati. Yathāha –
已对照篇首

「摩诃那摩,当圣弟子随念如来时,那时他的心不被贪所缠缚,不被瞋所缠缚,不被痴所缠缚;那时他的心正就如来而唯是正直的。摩诃那摩,心正直的圣弟子获得义喜(atthaveda),获得法喜(dhammaveda),获得与法相应的悦;悦者便生起喜」等(《增支部》6.10;《增支部》11.11)。

‘‘Yasmiṃ, mahānāma, samaye ariyasāvako tathāgataṃ anussarati, nevassa tasmiṃ samaye rāgapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na dosapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, na mohapariyuṭṭhitaṃ cittaṃ hoti, ujugatamevassa tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ hoti tathāgataṃ ārabbha. Ujugatacitto kho pana, mahānāma, ariyasāvako labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammavedaṃ, labhati dhammūpasaṃhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ, pamuditassa pīti jāyatī’’tiādi (a. ni. 6.10; a. ni. 11.11).
已对照篇首

或者,受尊重等之性[即]「宝」义。而这也已说过——

Cittīkatādibhāvo vā ratanaṭṭho. Vuttañhetaṃ –
已对照篇首

「受尊重、价值大, 无与伦比、难得见;

‘‘Cittīkataṃ mahagghañca, atulaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ;
已对照篇首

非下劣众生所受用,故称为宝。」(《小诵义注》6.3;《长部义注》2.33;《经集义注》1.226;《大义释义注》50)

Anomasattaparibhogaṃ, ratanaṃ tena vuccatī’’ti. (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 6.3; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33; su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.226; mahāni. aṭṭha. 50);
PTS 1.18缅 1.15已对照篇首

而受尊重之性等是不共他者的,唯于佛等[三宝]才可得。礼敬本身[即]「由礼敬所成(vandanāmaya)」,如「由布施所成、由持戒所成」(《长部》3.305;《如是语》60;《导论》34)。而此处「礼敬」[即]以身、语、心倾向三宝之德,或[即]赞叹。由生起应尊敬之有与果,[故为]「福(puñña)」;或者,[它]净化自己的相续[故为「福」]。 「障碍善除者」者:即障碍已被善除者——以此显示:由自己净信的成就与三宝田之性的成就,那福便有能力破除那些损害义之显明的灾祸。 「成为」者:[这]是前时动作,它与「我将显明[其]义」相关联。「它的」者:即那由礼敬三宝所成的那份福的。「以威力」者:即以力。

Cittīkatabhāvādayo ca anaññasādhāraṇā buddhādīsu eva labbhantīti. Vandanāva vandanāmayaṃ, yathā ‘‘dānamayaṃ, sīlamaya’’nti (dī. ni. 3.305; itivu. 60; netti. 34). Vandanā cettha kāyavācācittehi tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ guṇaninnatā, thomanā vā. Pujjabhavaphalanibbattanato puññaṃ, attano santānaṃ puṇātīti vā. Suvihatantarāyoti suṭṭhu vihatantarāyo, etena attano pasādasampattiyā, rattanattayassa ca khettabhāvasampattiyā taṃ puññaṃ atthappakāsanassa upaghātakaupaddavānaṃ vihanane samatthanti dasseti. Hutvāti pubbakālakiriyā, tassa ‘‘atthaṃ pakāsayissāmī’’ti etena sambandho. Tassāti yaṃ ratanattayavandanāmayaṃ puññaṃ, tassa. Ānubhāvenāti balena.
PTS 1.19已对照篇首

如是显示了作三宝敬礼[之事]中的目的之后,如今为先依赞其功德而告知他所欲释义的那一教说,[故]说了「长(dīgha)的」等语。 此中,「以长篇幅之经所标记的」者:即以长篇幅之诸经所标记的。以此显示:「长(dīgha)」这[名]是此阿含的随义之通称。 [设难:]诸经本身岂不就是阿含吗?那么是以诸经标记谁呢?——[通释:]依胜义这是真的;然而阿含是取诸经而施设的。因为正如于义与文句之总集有「经」这一言说,同样,于诸经之总集[便]有「阿含」这一言说。 由于有缘起等精微之义的存在,[故为]「[义]精微的」。 自利、他利等将于其中、由它、或从它而来,故为「阿含(āgama)」;是阿含而又是殊胜,故为「殊胜的阿含」。或者,[它]为诸通晓阿含者(āgamasammata)所许为殊胜,故为「殊胜的阿含」——[即]那[殊胜的阿含]的。 诸佛的随觉者[即]「佛与随佛觉者(buddhānubuddhā)」,[即]随从诸佛对谛的通达而通达了诸谛的上首弟子等诸圣者;[故「为佛与随佛觉者所赞述的」即]为他们依义之赞述与功德之赞述而赞述的[那部阿含]的。 或者,应配合为「诸佛与诸随觉者[即]佛与随佛觉者」。因为连三藏之义的释义次第也正是由正等正觉者所说的——它被称为「杂说(pakiṇṇakadesanā)」;诸阿阇梨说:从那[杂说]起,[其义]才由诸弟子依结集等方式[而被释]。

Evaṃ ratanattayassa nipaccakārakaraṇe payojanaṃ dassetvā, idāni yassā dhammadesanāya atthaṃ saṃvaṇṇetukāmo, tassā tāva guṇābhitthavanavasena upaññāpanatthaṃ ‘‘dīghassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dīghasuttaṅkitassāti dīghappamāṇasuttalakkhitassa, etena ‘‘dīgho’’ti ayaṃ imassa āgamassa atthānugatā samaññāti dasseti. Nanu ca suttāniyeva āgamo, kassa pana suttehi aṅkananti? Saccametaṃ paramatthato, suttāni pana upādāyapaññatto āgamo. Yathā hi atthabyañjanasamudāye ‘‘sutta’’nti vohāro, evaṃ suttasamudāye ‘‘āgamo’’ti vohāro. Paṭiccasamuppādādinipuṇatthasabbhāvato nipuṇassa. Āgamissanti ettha, etena, etasmā vā attatthaparatthādayoti āgamo, āgamo ca so varo cāti āgamavaro, āgamasammatehi vā varoti āgamavaro, tassa. Buddhānaṃ anubuddhā buddhānubuddhā, buddhānaṃ saccapaṭivedhaṃ anugamma paṭividdhasaccā aggasāvakādayo ariyā. Tehi atthasaṃvaṇṇanāvasena, guṇasaṃvaṇṇanāvasena ca saṃvaṇṇitassa. Atha vā buddhā ca anubuddhā ca buddhānubuddhāti yojetabbaṃ. Sammāsambuddheneva hi tiṇṇampi piṭakānaṃ atthavaṇṇanākkamo bhāsito, yā ‘‘pakiṇṇakadesanā’’ti vuccati, tato saṅgāyanādivasena sāvakehīti ācariyā vadanti.
缅 1.16已对照篇首

「[其]功德能引生净信的」者:即具有能于佛等[三宝]引生净信之成就的。因为这[部]阿含:于《梵网经》等(《长部》1.5-7、26-28)中依对戒、见等作无余之指示等方式,于《大本经》等(《长部》2.3-5)中依对过去诸佛的功德也作指示等方式,于《波梨经》等(《长部》3.3、4)中依破斥诸外道而作不可反转的师子吼之吼叫等方式,又于《无上经》等(《增支部》6.8)中特别以显明佛陀之功德,[如是]于三宝引生极为殊胜的净信。 而这是阿阇梨于诸释义中的常法:于彼彼释义之初,以称说彼彼所应释义之法的殊胜功德而作赞叹。正因如此,在《妄衍破斥》(Papañcasūdanī)、《显扬真义》(Sāratthappakāsinī)、《满足希求》(Manorathapūraṇī)以及《法集论义注》(Aṭṭhasālinī)等[义注]中,依次以「能破斥他论的」「能生智之分别的」「能生诸说法者中之上首的种种辩才的」「那为诸甚深智所潜入的、常以种种法门而为种种的阿毗达摩的」等语作了赞叹。

Saddhāvahaguṇassāti buddhādīsu pasādāvahasampattikassa. Ayañhi āgamo brahmajālādīsu (dī. ni. 1.5-7, 26-28) sīladiṭṭhādīnaṃ anavasesaniddesādivasena, mahāpadānādīsu (dī. ni. 2.3-5) purimabuddhānampi guṇaniddesādivasena, pāthikasuttādīsu (dī. ni. 3.3,4) titthiye nimadditvā appaṭivattiyasīhanāda nadanādivasena, anuttariyasuttādīsu (a. ni. 6.8) ca visesato buddhaguṇavibhāvanena ratanattaye sātisayappasādaṃ āvahati. Saṃvaṇṇanāsu cāyaṃ ācariyassa pakati, yā taṃtaṃsaṃvaṇṇanāsu ādito tassa tassa saṃvaṇṇetabbassa dhammassa visesaguṇakittanena thomanā. Tathā hi papañcasūdanīsāratthappakāsinīmanorathapūraṇīsu aṭṭhasālinīādīsu ca yathākkamaṃ ‘‘paravādamathanassa ñāṇappabhedajananassa dhammakathikapuṅgavānaṃ vicittappaṭibhānajananassa tassa gambhīrañāṇehi ogāḷhassa abhiṇhaso nānānayavicittassa abhidhammassā’’tiādinā thomanā katā.
PTS 1.20已对照篇首

由它而义被说,故为「义之说(atthakathā)」;它本身即「义注(aṭṭhakathā)」——是把 ttha 音作成 ṭṭha 音[而成],如「苦的恼害义(dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho)」(《无碍解道》2.8)。「最初」等[句]中,[「最初」即]于第一次结集时。 由于具足六神通之性与最上的心自在之性,又由于于诸禅等有五种自在之存在,[故为]「诸得自在者(vasī)」,[即]大迦叶(Mahākassapa)等诸长老;「五[个]他们之百」[即五百位]。 「那」者:即那部义注。「所结集」者:即在适于显明义之处,以「这是这[句]之义,这是这[句]之义」而结集起来所说的。「后来也被随结集」[即]后来也于第二、第三次结集中由耶舍(Yasa)长老等[所随结集]——以此显示自己释义的来处之清净。

Attho kathīyati etāyāti atthakathā, sā eva aṭṭhakathā, ttha-kārassa ṭṭha-kāraṃ katvā, yathā ‘‘dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho’’ti (paṭi. ma. 2.8). Ādito tiādimhi paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ. Chaḷabhiññatāya paramena cittavasībhāvena samannāgatattā, jhānādīsu pañcavidhavasitāsabbhāvato ca vasino, therā mahākassapādayo. Tesaṃ satehi pañcahi. Yāti yā aṭṭhakathā. Saṅgītāti atthaṃ pakāsetuṃ yuttaṭṭhāne ‘‘ayaṃ etassa attho, ayaṃ etassa attho’’ti saṅgahetvā vuttā. Anusaṅgītā ca yasattherādīhi pacchāpi dutiyatatiyasaṅgītīsu, iminā attano saṃvaṇṇanāya āgamanasuddhiṃ dasseti.
已对照篇首

由取、[即]由捕狮子,[故为]「师子[洲人](sīhaḷa)」,[即]师子童子。应知:由生于那世系,铜鍱洲(Tambapaṇṇidīpa)的诸刹帝利[有「师子」之性];又由是他们的住处,铜鍱洲也有「师子」之性。 「带到了」者:即从阎浮提被带来。「而后」者:即后来。因为在后分,为不相混杂,[故]义注以师子洲语(sīhaḷabhāsā)安立了下来。以此显示:由此,它的根本义注不是一切[人]所共通的,故这一义之显明必定应作。正因如此说「为诸洲住民的利益」。 此中,「诸洲住民的」者:即诸阎浮提住民的。或者,「诸洲住民的」者:[其]配合[是]:为诸师子洲(Sīhaḷadīpa)住民的利益而以师子洲语安立了下来。

Sīhassa lānato gahaṇato sīhaḷo, sīhakumāro. Taṃvaṃsajātatāya tambapaṇṇidīpe khattiyānaṃ, tesaṃ nivāsatāya tambapaṇṇidīpassa ca sīhaḷabhāvo veditabbo. Ābhatāti jambudīpato ānītā. Athāti pacchā. Aparabhāge hi asaṅkaratthaṃ sīhaḷabhāsāya aṭṭhakathā ṭhapitāti. Tenassa mūlaṭṭhakathā sabbasādhāraṇā na hotīti idaṃ atthappakāsanaṃ ekantena karaṇīyanti dasseti. Tenevāha – ‘‘dīpavāsīnamatthāyā’’ti. Tattha dīpavāsīnanti jambudīpavāsīnaṃ. Dīpavāsīnanti vā sīhaḷadīpavāsīnaṃ atthāya sīhaḷabhāsāya ṭhapitāti yojanā.
已对照篇首

「除去」者:即除去那如外衣一般的师子洲语。「从那」者:即从义注。「我」[一语]是指自己;「悦意之语」[则]是摩揭陀语(māgadhabhāsā)——因为它是自性之语,能令诸智者之意欢悦。正因如此说「契合圣典(tanti)之法则」——义即顺于圣典之趣、随顺圣典语的。「离于过失的」者:即离于非自性之语的他种语言。

Apanetvānāti kañcukasadisaṃ sīhaḷabhāsaṃ apanetvā. Tatoti aṭṭhakathāto. Ahanti attānaṃ niddisati. Manoramaṃ bhāsanti māgadhabhāsaṃ. Sā hi sabhāvaniruttibhūtā paṇḍitānaṃ manaṃ ramayatīti. Tenevāha – ‘‘tantinayānucchavika’’nti, pāḷigatiyā anulomikaṃ pāḷibhāsāyānuvidhāyininti attho. Vigatadosanti asabhāvaniruttibhāsantararahitaṃ.
PTS 1.21缅 1.17已对照篇首

「不违背……的宗义(samaya)」者:即不违逆宗义;以此说无有义之过失——因为正由于不相违,诸长老之说于此处也将被显示。 「长老世系的明灯」者:由于具足坚固的戒蕴等,[故为]「诸长老」,[即]大迦叶等;由他们而来的阿阇梨相承[即]「长老世系」;[他们]摄属于它,由具足阿含与证得,[且]以慧灯令它光耀,[故为]「长老世系的明灯」,[即]住于大寺(Mahāvihāra)的诸长老——[即]那些[人]的。 依种种行相而被决定,故为「抉择(vinicchaya)」,[即]于诸结节之处以除障之行相而转起的、能断疑惑的论说;他们的抉择善为精微、细致,故为「抉择极为精微」。或者,[它]抉择,故为「抉择」,[即]以如上所说之义为境的智;他们的抉择善为精微、善巧,故为「抉择极为精微」——以此显示:住于大寺者的抉择是由大迦叶等长老相承而来的,正由此而不颠倒、细致、微细;[故]它有作为准量之性。

Samayaṃ avilomentoti siddhantaṃ avirodhento, etena atthadosābhāvamāha. Aviruddhattā eva hi theravādāpi idha pakāsiyissanti. Theravaṃsapadīpānanti thirehi sīlakkhandhādīhi samannāgatattā therā, mahākassapādayo. Tehi āgatā ācariyaparamparā theravaṃso, tappariyāpannā hutvā āgamādhigamasampannattā paññāpajjotena tassa samujjalanato theravaṃsapadīpā, mahāvihāravāsino therā, tesaṃ. Vividhehi ākārehi nicchīyatīti vinicchayo, gaṇṭhiṭṭhānesu khīlamaddanākārena pavattā vimaticchedakathā. Suṭṭhu nipuṇo saṇho vinicchayo etesanti sunipuṇavinicchayā. Atha vā vinicchinotīti vinicchayo, yathāvuttavisayaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Suṭṭhu nipuṇo cheko vinicchayo etesanti sunipuṇavinicchayā, etena mahākassapāditheraparamparābhato, tatoyeva ca aviparīto saṇhasukhumo mahāvihāravāsīnaṃ vinicchayoti tassa pamāṇabhūtataṃ dasseti.
已对照篇首

「善人的……并(sujanassa ca)」者:「ca」一语是合集义;以它显示不唯为诸阎浮提住民的利益,而也是为令善人欢喜。又以它,也为诸铜鍱洲住民的利益这一义便得成立——因为由受持等[变得]容易,对他们也多所助益。 「为令[法]久住」者:即为久住之义,义即为长时之住立。因为这一义之显明,由于是不颠倒地善安置文与善引导义的方便,[故]导致正法的久住。而这是世尊所说的——

Sujanassa cāti ca-saddo sampiṇḍanattho, tena na kevalaṃ jambudīpavāsīnameva atthāya, atha kho sādhujanatosanatthañcāti dasseti, tena ca tambapaṇṇidīpavāsīnampi atthāyāti ayamattho siddho hoti, uggahaṇādisukaratāya tesampi bahupakārattā. Ciraṭṭhitatthanti ciraṭṭhitiatthaṃ, cirakālaṭṭhitiyāti attho. Idañhi atthappakāsanaṃ aviparītabyañjanasunikkhepassa atthasunayassa ca upāyabhāvato saddhammassa ciraṭṭhitiyā saṃvattati. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
已对照篇首

「诸比丘,此二法导致正法的住立、不忘失、不隐没。何为二?善安置的句文,与善引导的义。」(《增支部》2.21)

‘‘Dveme, bhikkhave, dhammā saddhammassa ṭhitiyā asammosāya anantaradhānāya saṃvattanti. Katame dve? Sunikkhattañca padabyañjanaṃ, attho ca sunīto’’ti (a. ni. 2.21).
PTS 1.22缅 1.18已对照篇首

为避免他所欲作的义之释义过于庞大,[故]说了「戒论」等语。正因如此说「在此[义注中]不再多加论究它」。 或者,[阿阇梨]为对诸讲说者作教示——[即]「《清净道论》(Visuddhimagga)也应作为他所欲作的那部义注的一部分而被取来」——[故]以「戒论」等语依总说而显示那里所论究的诸法。 此中,「戒论」者:即依作持、止持等[分]的戒之广论。「头陀法(dhutadhamma)」者:即常乞食支等(《清净道论》1.22;《长老偈义注》2.845、849)十三种振落烦恼之法。「一切业处」者:即圣典中所来的三十八种、义注中[所来的]二[种],[如是]无余的、瑜伽之业[即]修习的转起之处。「连同性行(cariyā)之分判」者:即连同对贪行者等的自性等之分判。 而「禅与等至的广说」中——「诸禅」[即]四色界禅,「诸等至」[即]四无色等至。或者,八[禅]中唯所已得者为「诸禅」,由证得入定自在之性[者]为「诸等至」。或者,「诸禅」[即]色界与无色界禅,「诸等至」[即]果等至与灭尽等至。

Yaṃ atthavaṇṇanaṃ kattukāmo, tassā mahattaṃ pariharituṃ ‘‘sīlakathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘na taṃ idha vicārayissāmī’’ti. Atha vā yaṃ aṭṭhakathaṃ kattukāmo, tadekadesabhāvena visuddhimaggo ca gahetabboti kathikānaṃ upadesaṃ karonto tattha vicāritadhamme uddesavasena dasseti ‘‘sīlakathā’’ tiādinā. Tattha sīlakathāti cārittavārittādivasena sīlavitthārakathā. Dhutadhammāti piṇḍapātikaṅgādayo (visuddhi. 1.22; theragā. aṭṭha. 2.845, 849) terasa kilesadhunanakadhammā. Kammaṭṭhānāni sabbānīti pāḷiyaṃ āgatāni aṭṭhatiṃsa, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dveti niravasesāni yogakammassa bhāvanāya pavattiṭṭhānāni. Cariyāvidhānasahitoti rāgacaritādīnaṃ sabhāvādividhānena sahito. Jhānāni cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānāni, samāpattiyo catasso arūpasamāpattiyo. Aṭṭhapi vā paṭiladdhamattāni jhānāni, samāpajjanavasībhāvappattiyā samāpattiyo. Jhānāni vā rūpārūpāvacarajjhānāni, samāpattiyo phalasamāpattinirodhasamāpattiyo.
已对照篇首

有世间与出世间之别的六神通[即]「一切神通」。依《智分别》(Ñāṇavibhaṅga,《分别论》之一品)等中所来之法,以一种等[之门]对慧作合计、[即]合摄而[作]抉择,[即是]「慧的合计与抉择」。

Lokiyalokuttarabhedā cha abhiññāyo sabbā abhiññāyo. Ñāṇavibhaṅgādīsu āgatanayena ekavidhādinā paññāya saṅkaletvā sampiṇḍetvā nicchayo paññāsaṅkalananicchayo.
已对照篇首

因等诸缘法对诸缘生法而有因缘等之性,[即]「缘之行相(paccayākāra)」;它的教说[即]「缘之行相的教说」,义即缘起之论。 而它由密集的分解(ghanavinibbhoga)极难为而细致微细,[又]离于他部派之说的混杂,又[它]是连同一性之法门等而于那里被论究的——[故阿阇梨]说「[其]理趣极清净而精微」。 由于是不舍弃《无碍解[道]》等中所来之法而被论究的,[故为]「不离圣典之道」。

Paccayadhammānaṃ hetādīnaṃ paccayuppannadhammānaṃ hetupaccayādibhāvo paccayākāro, tassa desanā paccayākāradesanā, paṭiccasamuppādakathāti attho. Sā pana ghanavinibbhogassa sudukkaratāya saṇhasukhumā, nikāyantaraladdhisaṅkararahitā, ekattanayādisahitā ca tattha vicāritāti āha – ‘‘suparisuddhanipuṇanayā’’ti. Paṭisambhidādīsu āgatanayaṃ avissajjetvāva vicāritattā avimuttatanti maggā.
已对照篇首

「然而这一切(iti pana sabbaṃ)」者:「iti」一语是于结束,「pana」一语是于语之庄严,义即「这一切」。「在此」者:即于这部义注。意趣[是]:由于会成重复,故「不再多加论究」。

Iti pana sabbanti iti-saddo parisamāpane, pana-saddo vacanālaṅkāre, etaṃ sabbanti attho. Idhāti imissā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Na vicārayissāmi, punaruttibhāvatoti adhippāyo.
已对照篇首

如今为决定说出不论究它的确定理由,[阿阇梨]说了「此《清净道论》,正处于……之中央」等语。 此中,以「正处于……之中央」「住[于其中]」[二语],由阐明处于中央之性而显示:《清净道论》特别是四阿含的共通义注,不像《吉祥悦意》等是不共通的义注。「特别」这[语]是因《清净道论》对律与阿毗达摩也随其所应正是义之释义[这一点]而说的。

Idāni tasseva avicāraṇassa ekantakāraṇaṃ niddhārento ‘‘majjhe visuddhimaggo’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘majjhe ṭhatvā’’ti etena majjhebhāvadīpanena visesato catunnaṃ āgamānaṃ sādhāraṇaṭṭhakathā visuddhimaggo, na sumaṅgalavilāsinīādayo viya asādhāraṇaṭṭhakathāti dasseti. ‘‘Visesato’’ti idaṃ vinayābhidhammānampi visuddhimaggo yathārahaṃ atthavaṇṇanā hoti yevāti katvā vuttaṃ.
已对照篇首

「正是这样(icceva)」者:即「iti eva」。「它也」者:即《清净道论》也。「连同这部[义注]」者:即《吉祥悦意》(Sumaṅgalavilāsinī)。 而此中,以「[由得自在者马哈玛欣德]带到了师子洲」等语显示显明义[这一事]的因相;以「为诸洲住民的利益」「为令善人欢喜」「并为令法久住」[显示其]目的;以其余[语显示]作[义注]的方式——因为不论究戒论等,于此处也正是作[义注]的方式。

Iccevāti iti eva. Tampīti visuddhimaggampi. Etāyāti sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā. Ettha ca ‘‘sīhaḷadīpaṃ ābhatā’’tiādinā atthappakāsanassa nimittaṃ dasseti, ‘‘dīpavāsīnamatthāya, sujanassa ca tuṭṭhatthaṃ, ciraṭṭhitatthañca dhammassā’’ti etena payojanaṃ, avasiṭṭhena karaṇappakāraṃ. Sīlakathādīnaṃ avicāraṇampi hi idha karaṇappakāro evāti.
已对照篇首

〈序论释义〉,终。

Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Nidānakathāvaṇṇanā
已对照篇首

因缘论释义

PTS 1.23缅 1.19已对照篇首

凡有分类者,其自体的显明唯以显示[其]分类为门而有;所以[义注]为先依品与经显示[其]分类,便说了「此中,所谓《长部》(dīghāgama)者」等语。此中,「此中(tattha)」者:即在所说的「[我要]显明殊胜的《长部》之义」那一句话中。义即:凡被誓言「[我]将显明其义」的那[一部],便名为《长部》——[而它]就品与经而言,其分类是这样的。或者,「此中」[是就]「依于《长部》之义」这一句话[而言]。义即:所说的那[部]《长部》,就品等而言是如此这般的。为显示自己的解说唯依[诸法]于第一次大结集中所置定的次第而转起,[义注]便说了「在它的诸品中……乃至……所说的……为首的因缘」。 [设难:]那么,为何在四阿含中《长部》最先被结集,而在它[之中]〈戒蕴品〉被最先置定,又在那[品]中是《梵网[经]》呢?——[答:]这一诘问无论于何处都不是不能提起的;然而[当说:]由于[其]功德能引生净信,《长部》才最先被结集。因为信是诸善法的种子。正如[所]说——「信是种子,苦行是雨水」(《相应部》1.197;《经集》77);而它的「[其]功德能引生净信」[之性]也已显示过了。又由于[它]是若干部经的合集、[篇幅]量少,故于领受、忆持等为易;正因如此,这[一部]是三十四部经的合集,[篇幅]量为六十四诵分。而由于戒论众多,〈戒蕴品〉才被最先置定。因为戒是教法之初——由于一切功德以戒为住立处。正因如此[世尊]说了——「所以,比丘,你正应于诸善法中清净其最初[之法]。什么是诸善法之初?即极清净的戒」等(《相应部》5.395)。而以此便说出了这一品的名称是随义而立的(anvatthasaññatā)。而应知:由于是解开[诸]见之论,作为经藏中对诸见作无余分别[之经]的《梵网[经]》才被最先置定。因为在三藏佛语中,再没有像《梵网[经]》那样把诸见执整治得无丛、无结而加以分别的经了。

Vibhāgavantānaṃ sabhāvavibhāvanaṃ vibhāgadassanavaseneva hotīti paṭhamaṃ tāva vaggasuttavasena vibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha dīghāgamo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tatthāti ‘‘dīghassa āgamavarassa atthaṃ pakāsayissāmī’’ti yadidaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ vacane. Yassa atthaṃ pakāsayissāmīti paṭiññātaṃ, so dīghāgamo nāma vaggasuttavasena evaṃ vibhāgoti attho. Atha vā tatthāti ‘‘dīghāgamanissitamattha’’nti etasmiṃ vacane. Yo dīghāgamo vutto, so vaggādivasena edisoti attho. Attano saṃvaṇṇanāya paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiyaṃ nikkhittānukkameneva pavattabhāvadassanatthaṃ ‘‘tassa vaggesu…pe… vuttaṃ nidānamādī’’ti āha. Kasmā pana catūsu āgamesu dīghāgamo paṭhamaṃ saṅgīto, tattha ca sīlakkhandhavaggo ādito nikkhitto, tasmiñca brahmajālanti? Nāyamanuyogo katthacipi na pavattati, api ca saddhāvahaguṇato dīghanikāyo paṭhamaṃ saṅgīto. Saddhā hi kusaladhammānaṃ bījaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘saddhā bījaṃ tapo vuṭṭhī’’ti, (saṃ. ni. 1.197; su. ni. 77) saddhāvahaguṇatā cassa dassitāyeva. Kiñca katipayasuttasaṅgahato, appaparimāṇato ca gahaṇadhāraṇādisukhato. Tathāhesa catuttiṃsasuttasaṅgaho catusaṭṭhibhāṇavāraparimāṇo ca. Sīlakathābāhullato pana sīlakkhandhavaggo paṭhamaṃ nikkhitto. Sīlañhi sāsanassa ādi, sīlapatiṭṭhānattā sabbaguṇānaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘tasmā tiha, tvaṃ bhikkhu, ādimeva visodhehi kusalesu dhammesu. Ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ? Sīlañca suvisuddha’’ntiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.395). Etena cassa vaggassa anvatthasaññatā vuttā hoti. Diṭṭhiviniveṭhanakathābhāvato pana suttantapiṭakassa niravasesadiṭṭhivibhajanaṃ brahmajālaṃ paṭhamaṃ nikkhittanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tepiṭake hi buddhavacane brahmajālasadisaṃ diṭṭhigatāni niggumbaṃ nijjaṭaṃ katvā vibhattasuttaṃ natthīti.
Paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā
已对照篇首

第一次大结集论释义

PTS 1.24缅 1.20已对照篇首

[义注]既想依[诸法]于第一次大结集中所置定的次第而作解说,[便]为显示那[结集]、以及它虽已编入[律藏的]圣典(tanti)而[仍]于此处说[它]的理由,说了「第一次大结集……乃至……应如是了知」。此中,把因随缘而在彼彼处被开示、被制立、[从而]散在各处的法与律摄集起来而唱诵、[即]讲说,[名为]「结集(saṅgīti)」;以此,在各各学处与诸经的开头与末尾、以及中间各处依连接[之需]而置下的结集者之语,便被摄入[其中]了。由境广大与应受供养[之故]而为大的结集,[名为]「大结集」;最初的大结集[即]「第一次大结集」;它所转起之时[即]「第一次大结集之时」;[「在第一次大结集时」,即]在那第一次大结集之时。而「因缘(nidāna)」者:把依说处、说时等[而言]本不可知的开示作成可知而指示出来(nidasseti),故为「因缘」。 虽然世尊也另有作为众生获得见无上、归依等之因的其他诸作业存在,然而[唯有]随顺「[我]已觉悟,[我]将令[他人]觉悟」(《佛种姓义注·宝经行处品之解释》;《所行藏义注·摄颂之解释》)这一誓言、作为诸所化者证得道与果之因的作业,才直接地[说]即是佛所作事——[义注]故说「因为,从转法轮起」。此中,信根等法本身以「转起」之义[而名为]「轮」,[故为]「法轮」。或者,「轮」[即]威令(āṇā);由于不离于法,[它]既是法、又是轮,[故为]「法轮」;又依法、[即]依理而转(cakkati),[故]也[名为]「法轮」。正如[圣典]所说——

Yassā paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiyaṃ nikkhittānukkamena saṃvaṇṇanaṃ kattukāmo, taṃ, tassā ca tantiāruḷhāya idha vacane kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti…pe… veditabbā’’ti āha. Tattha yathāpaccayaṃ tattha tattha desitattā, paññattattā ca vippakiṇṇānaṃ dhammavinayānaṃ saṅgahetvā gāyanaṃ kathanaṃ saṅgīti, etena taṃtaṃsikkhāpadānaṃ suttānañca ādipariyosānesu, antarantarā ca sambandhavasena ṭhapitaṃ saṅgītikāravacanaṃ saṅgahitaṃ hoti. Mahāvisayattā, pūjanīyattā ca mahatī saṅgīti mahāsaṅgīti, paṭhamā mahāsaṅgīti paṭhamamahāsaṅgīti, tassā pavattikālo paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikālo, tasmiṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle. Nidānanti ca desanaṃ desakālādivasena aviditaṃ viditaṃ katvā nidassetīti nidānaṃ. Sattānaṃ dassanānuttariyasaraṇādipaṭilābhahetubhūtāsu vijjamānāsupi aññāsu bhagavato kiriyāsu ‘‘buddho bodheyya’’nti (bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. ratanacaṅkamanakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; cariyā. uddhānagāthāvaṇṇanā) paṭiññāya anulomato veneyyānaṃ maggaphalappattīnaṃ hetubhūtā kiriyā nippariyāyena buddhakiccanti āha – ‘‘dhammacakkappavattanañhi ādiṃ katvā’’ti. Tattha saddhindriyādidhammoyeva pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti dhammacakkaṃ. Atha vā cakkanti āṇā, dhammato anapetattā dhammañca taṃ cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammena ñāyena cakkantipi dhammacakkaṃ. Yathāha –
已对照篇首

「[它]既转起法、又[转起]轮,故为『法轮』;[它]既转起轮、又[转起]法,故为『法轮』;[它]以法而转起,故为『法轮』;[它]以法行而转起,故为『法轮』」等(《无碍解道》2、39、41)。

‘‘Dhammañca pavatteti cakkañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, cakkañca pavatteti dhammañcāti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammena pavattetīti dhammacakkaṃ, dhammacariyāya pavattetīti dhammacakka’’ntiādi (paṭi. ma. 2, 39, 41).
PTS 1.25已对照篇首

「佛所作事已作毕的」——以此显示佛所应作的[事]没有任何一项残留。[设难:]岂不是[这样]:由诸弟子所调伏的所化者也正是由世尊所调伏的——正因如此,弟子所说的经才被称为「佛语」;而由诸弟子[所应调伏]的所化者[在那时]还没有被调伏呀?——[答:]这不成过失,因为调伏他们的方法已安立于诸弟子[身上]了。正因如此[世尊]说了——

‘‘Katabuddhakicce’’ti etena buddhakattabbassa kassacipi asesitabhāvaṃ dasseti. Nanu ca sāvakehi vinītāpi vineyyā bhagavatāyeva vinītā honti, yato sāvakabhāsitaṃ suttaṃ ‘‘buddhavacana’’nti vuccati, sāvakavineyyā ca na tāva vinītāti? Nāyaṃ doso tesaṃ vinayanupāyassa sāvakesu ṭhapitattā. Tenevāha –
已对照篇首

「波旬,只要我的比丘弟子还没有成为贤明的、已受调教的、有自信的、多闻的、持法的……乃至……还没有能以如法[之言]善加折伏已生起的他人异论而教示有示导的法,我就不会般涅槃」等(《长部》2.168;《相应部》5.822;《自说》51)。

‘‘Na tāvāhaṃ, pāpima, parinibbāyissāmi, yāva me bhikkhū na sāvakā bhavissanti viyattā vinītā visāradā bahussutā dhammadharā…pe… uppannaṃ parappavādaṃ saha dhammena suniggahitaṃ niggahetvā sappāṭihāriyaṃ dhammaṃ desessa’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 2.168; saṃ. ni. 5.822; udā. 51).
缅 1.21已对照篇首

「于拘尸那罗」等——[这]对世尊般涅槃之处与时的差别的显示,是为了显示「世尊未般涅槃」这一执取之谬,又为了显示[他]确曾于世间生长。正因如此,为使[自己的]人之身分极为显然,诸大菩萨在最后一生中也会有娶妻等[事]。 「由业与烦恼所执取」,故为「取(upādi)」,[即]诸异熟蕴,以及业所作之色。而那「取」,在[初]证涅槃时由破除烦恼魔与行魔而尚未被舍离,[而]在此处由破除蕴魔与死魔而被舍离、[令]无余——故这[界]是「无余涅槃界」。而此中「涅槃界」者,所意指的唯是寂灭(nibbuti);而这是于如是有之相(itthambhūtalakkhaṇa)[之义]上的具格之说示。 「于舍利分配之日」这[语]不是「已聚集的」这[语]的限定语,而是「生起热忱」[一事]的限定语,[即]「在舍利分配之日于诸比丘中生起了热忱」。因为诸比丘是在舍利分配之日以前的那些日子里就陆续会合了的。或者,义即:「于舍利分配之日已聚集的」[是指]依身之和合而聚集一处的[诸比丘]。僧团的上座[即]「僧团上座」;而那僧团是多少之量呢?——[义注]故说「七十万比丘」。因为由于[前后语]恒常相待,在这样的[语]中正有复合语(samāsa)可成,如「提婆达多的师家」[一语]。

‘‘Kusinārāya’’ntiādi bhagavato parinibbutadesakālavisesadassanaṃ ‘‘aparinibbuto bhagavā’’ti gāhassa micchābhāvadassanatthaṃ, loke jātasaṃvaddhabhāvadassanatthañca. Tathā hi manussabhāvassa supākaṭakaraṇatthaṃ mahābodhisattā carimabhave dārapariggahādīnipi karontīti. Upādīyate kammakilesehīti upādi, vipākakkhandhā kaṭattā ca rūpaṃ. So pana upādi kilesābhisaṅkhāramāranimmathanena nibbānappattiyaṃ anossaṭṭho, idha khandhamaccumāranimmathanena ossaṭṭho nissesitoti ayaṃ anupādisesā, nibbānadhātu. Nibbānadhātūti cettha nibbutimattaṃ adhippetaṃ, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cāyaṃ karaṇaniddeso. ‘‘Dhātubhājanadivase’’ti idaṃ na ‘‘sannipatitāna’’nti etassa visesanaṃ, ussāhajananassa pana visesanaṃ, ‘‘dhātubhājanadivase bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesī’’ti. Dhātubhājanadivasato hi purimapurimataradivasesu bhikkhū samāgatāti. Atha vā dhātubhājanadivase sannipatitānaṃ kāyasāmaggīvasena sahitānanti attho. Saṅghassa thero saṅghatthero, so pana saṅgho kiṃ parimāṇānanti āha – ‘‘sattannaṃ bhikkhusatasahassāna’’nti. Niccasāpekkhatāya hi edisesu samāso hotiyeva, yathā – ‘‘devadattassa garukula’’nti.
PTS 1.26已对照篇首

[语句的]连结[是]:「具寿大迦叶……又想到[这样的僧团集会]以后难得,[便]于诸比丘中生起了热忱」。「于舍利分配之日已聚集的」这[语],也应与「于诸比丘中生起了热忱」这[句]中「诸比丘」这一句相连结。[语句的]连结[是]:「忆念起年老出家者须跋陀所说的那番话」;此中,意趣[是]:「忆念起」[是]依法之悚惧[而忆念]。「便令正法隐没」「[我何不]结集」……乃至……「长久住立」「对那[恩德],还有什么别的偿债(āṇaṇya)呢」——这些句与「如是思惟」这[语]相连结。同样,「又,我之所以」这[语]与「受摄受」「加以称赞」这[二语]相连结。「[存在这样的情况,]恶比丘们」——此中「yaṃ」唯是不变词,或[是]原因之说示,义即:由于某个原因[他们]会令[正法]隐没,而那个原因是存在的。「堪于经久」者:即行于长途之道者,义即堪于长时。

Āyasmā mahākassapo puna dullabhabhāvaṃ maññamāno bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesīti sambandho. ‘‘Dhātubhājanadivase sannipatitāna’’nti idaṃ ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhaṃ janesī’’ti ettha ‘‘bhikkhūna’’nti imināpi padena sambandhanīyaṃ. Subhaddena vuḍḍhapabbajitena vuttavacanamanussarantoti sambandho. Tattha anussaranto dhammasaṃvegavasenāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Saddhammaṃ antaradhāpeyyuṃ saṅgāyeyyaṃ…pe… ciraṭṭhitikaṃ tassa kimaññaṃ āṇaṇyaṃ bhavissatī’’ti etesaṃ padānaṃ ‘‘iti cintayanto’’ti etena sambandho. Tathā ‘‘yañcāha’’nti etassa ‘‘anuggahito pasaṃsito’’ti etena sambandho. Yaṃ pāpabhikkhūti ettha yanti nipātamattaṃ, kāraṇaniddeso vā, yena kāraṇena antaradhāpeyyuṃ, tadetaṃ kāraṇaṃ vijjatīti attho, addhaniyanti addhānamaggagāmi, addhānakkhamanti attho.
PTS 1.27缅 1.22已对照篇首

「又,我之所以」——此中「yaṃ」[即]「由于」,所说的是「由于某个原因」;或者这[「yaṃ」]是对作业的指涉,以它便指涉了「受摄受」「加以称赞」[二语中]的摄受与称赞。「以于衣上共同受用」——此中应从「[被]安立为与自己同等」[一语]把「自己」一语引来,配释为「以于衣上与[他]自己共同受用」。因为「凡与某[语]有关系者,纵然位置遥远,那[语]也正是它的[关系语]」。或者,应配释为「由世尊、以于衣上共同受用而为世尊所摄受」;因为这一具格之说示也可能有显示共同[作]与作者之义[的作用]。 「只要(yāvade)」者:即「yāvadeva」,[义即]多少时间、或于多少等至住、神通住中[我]愿意而住、亦[如是]言说,迦叶也是这样——此是[其]义。而应知:这[语]是依九次第住与六神通之性的共通而唯作赞叹[之辞]说的。因为具寿大迦叶并不像世尊那样每日入二百四十万俱胝之数的等至,也不依双神变等[方式]运用诸神通。正因如此[义注]说了「在以九次第住与六神通为别的」。「对那[恩德],还有什么别的偿债呢」——意趣[是]:除了结集法与律[之外,别无偿债]。以「世尊岂不是……」等[语],[义注]依比喻阐明了已说之义。

Yañcāhanti ettha yanti yasmā, yena kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti, kiriyāparāmasanaṃ vā etaṃ, tena ‘‘anuggahito pasaṃsito’’ti ettha anuggaṇhanaṃ pasaṃsanañca parāmasati. ‘‘Cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogenā’’ti ettha ‘‘attanā samasamaṭṭhapanenā’’ti idha attanā-saddaṃ ānetvā cīvare attanā sādhāraṇaparibhogenāti yojetabbaṃ. Yassa yena hi sambandho dūraṭṭhampi ca tassa tanti atha vā bhagavatā cīvare sādhāraṇaparibhogena bhagavatā anuggahitoti yojanīyaṃ, etassāpi hi karaṇaniddesassa sahayogakattutthajotakattasambhavato. Yāvadeti yāvadeva, yattakaṃ kālaṃ, yattake vā samāpattivihāre, abhiññāvihāre vā ākaṅkhanto viharāmi ceva voharāmi ca, tathā kassapopīti attho. Idañca navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññabhāvasāmaññena thutimattaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi āyasmā mahākassapo bhagavā viya devasikaṃ catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhyā samāpattiyo samāpajjati, yamakapāṭihāriyādivasena vā abhiññāyo vaḷañjetīti. Tenevāha – ‘‘navānupubbavihārachaḷabhiññāppabhede’’ti. Tassa kimaññaṃ āṇaṇyaṃ bhavissati, aññatra dhammavinayasaṅgāyanāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Nanu maṃ bhagavā’’tiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ upamāvasena vibhāveti.
已对照篇首

「此后」者:即在那于诸比丘中生起热忱之后。「趁非法尚未炽盛(pure adhammo dippati)」者:「dippati」也[即]「dibbati」;义即:在非法能够排拒法之前,[正]要趁其更早[之时]。因为这「pure(趁……之前)」一语是用于[时]临近而[事]非所愿[之处]。而「dippati(炽盛)」[即]「dippissati(将炽盛)」。因为由与「pure」一语连用,这现在时的用法[是]用于未来之义,如「趁天还未下雨(purā vassati devo)」[一语]。

Tato paranti tato bhikkhūnaṃ ussāhajananato parato. Pure adhammo dippatīti apināma dibbati, yāva adhammo dhammaṃ paṭibāhituṃ samattho hoti, tato puretaramevāti attho. Āsanne anicchite hi ayaṃ pure-saddo. Dippatīti ca dippissati. Puresaddasanniyogena hi anāgatatthe ayaṃ vattamānappayogo, yathā – ‘‘purā vassati devo’’ti.
PTS 1.28缅 1.23已对照篇首

「持整个九分导师教说之教理(pariyatti)的……乃至……[共]差一位便满五百」——以此显示:虽然直到纯观行的漏尽[者]为止的上述诸人也确有阿含与证得,然而连同诸无碍解而具足三明等功德者,由于阿含与证得的成就已达最上,[故]于结集为多所助益。 这[语]说在〈结集犍度〉中(《波罗夷》437)——「没有一样[对他]是非亲见的」,[这]是由于[于他]是熟练现行的;而在《普端严》中则说「没有一样是不当面领受的」(《波罗夷义注·第一次大结集论》),那[语]是因[即使]说为「二千[法]从比丘[处领受]」的[那些法]也正是在世尊座下所领受的[这一点]而说的。「[共]八万四千」者:[义注]是就诸法蕴而说。「所熟练的」者:即熟练的。 由于阿难长老[门下]多为新学的众[弟子]还俗,大迦叶长老才这样说——「这孩子真不知分量啊!」此中,「分量」者:即限度。[其]句之分别[是]「chandā āgamanaṃ viya(如同随欲而行)」。应知:「虽然是有学」这[语]不是因诸有学[仍]有趣于非处[之事]而说的,而是因所挑选的唯是诸无学[而说的];因为四种趣于非处唯以第一道便被断除了。而「[却]不可能因欲……乃至……而趣于非处」[一语],是依显示他堪任于法的结集而讲说[其]现有的功德。「已学得」者:即已修学。

‘‘Sakalanavaṅgasatthusāsanapariyattidhare…pe… ekūnapañcasate pariggahesī’’ti etena sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavapariyantānaṃ yathāvuttapuggalānaṃ satipi āgamādhigamasabbhāve saha paṭisambhidāhi pana tevijjādiguṇayuttānaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiyā ukkaṃsagatattā saṅgītiyā bahupakārataṃ dasseti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ saṅgītikkhandhake, (pārā. 437) apaccakkhaṃ nāma natthi paguṇappavattibhāvato, samantapāsādikāyaṃ pana ‘‘asammukhā paṭiggahitaṃ nāma natthī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathā) vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘dve sahassāni bhikkhuto’’ti vuttampi bhagavato santike paṭiggahitamevāti katvā vuttaṃ. Caturāsītisahassānīti dhammakkhandhe sandhāyāha. Pavattinoti paguṇāni. Ānandattherassa navappāyāya parisāya vibbhamanena mahākassapatthero evamāha – ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’ti. Tattha mattanti pamāṇaṃ. Chandā āgamanaṃ viyāti padavibhāgo. ‘‘Kiñcāpi sekkho’’ti idaṃ na sekkhānaṃ agatigamanasabbhāvena vuttaṃ, asekkhānameva pana uccinitattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paṭhamamaggeneva hi cattāri agatigamanāni pahīyantīti. ‘‘Abhabbo chandā…pe… agatiṃ gantu’’nti ca dhammasaṅgītiyā tassa yogyabhāvadassanena vijjamānaguṇakathanaṃ. Pariyattoti adhīto.
已对照篇首

诸牛于此[处]行,故为「牛行处(gocara)」;如牛行处[一般],故为「乞食处(gocara)」,[即]比丘行乞之处。「异分之人」[即]如须跋陀那样的[人]。「矛栏」者:[义注]是就诸末罗王以手持矛、剑等的人们为世尊的舍利作守护而说。「[他]便断了那障碍而作那应作之事」者:义即:把作结集者所应断的[障碍]断了之后,[专]作那一件应作之事。「大众」者:即众多人。意趣[是]:「都礼敬香室」[是]由于[它]是受用塔。「就如任何一个[具上述性质者]」者:义即:正如另一个具上述性质者[所会那样],[便]是这样。「使他生起悚惧」者:即以「世尊岂不是早已宣示过——『与一切可爱可意[之人物]都有别离、有分离』」等[语](《长部》2.183;《相应部》5.379;《增支部》10.48;《小品》437)而使[他]生起了悚惧。「诸界过盛」者:即病素积集[之身]。「少量的药」者:即少许的药;因为这「mattā」一语是少量之义,如在「若舍少乐(mattāsukhapariccāga)」等[句](《法句》290)中[那样]。「在第二日」者:即在被天神使生悚惧之日、或进入祇树林精舍之日的第二日。威令即是轮,[故为]「威令之轮」。

Gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gocaro viya gocaro, bhikkhācaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. Visabhāgapuggalo subhaddasadiso. Sattipañjaranti sattikhaggādihatthehi purisehi mallarājūnaṃ bhagavato dhātuārakkhakaraṇaṃ sandhāyāha. Taṃ palibodhaṃ chinditvā taṃ karaṇīyaṃ karotūti saṅgāhakena chinditabbaṃ chinditvā ekantakaraṇīyaṃ karotūti attho. Mahājananti bahujanaṃ. Gandhakuṭiṃ vanditvā paribhogacetiyabhāvatoti adhippāyo. Yathā tanti yathā aññopi yathāvuttasabhāvo, evanti attho. Saṃvejesīti ‘‘nanu bhagavatā paṭikacceva akkhātaṃ – ‘sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo vinābhāvo’’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.183; saṃ. ni. 5.379; a. ni. 10.48; cūḷava. 437) saṃvegaṃ janesi. Ussannadhātukanti upacitadosaṃ. Bhesajjamattāti appakaṃ bhesajjaṃ. Appattho hi ayaṃ mattā-saddo, ‘‘mattāsukhapariccāgo’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 290) viya. Dutiyadivaseti devatāya saṃvejitadivasato, jetavanavihāraṃ paviṭṭhadivasato vā dutiyadivase. Āṇāva cakkaṃ āṇācakkaṃ.
PTS 1.29已对照篇首

「这是最上的」者:即「这[位]是最上的」;因为这一说示[是]依性的转换(liṅgavipallāsa)[而作]。而「即(yadidaṃ)」者:即「凡这[位]」;或应[如]「即这五蕴(yadidaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ)」[那样]配释。 [设难:]「贤友优波离,第一条波罗夷是在何处制定的」——[这]为何这样说呢?岂不是在结集之前的时候,它是第一[条]并不合宜吗?——[答:]不,并非不合宜;因为依世尊制戒的次第、以及依[波罗提木叉]诵出的次第,[它的]第一之性已成立。应知:因为三藏大多正是依世尊住世时所住立的次第而被结集的,尤其是律藏与阿毗达摩藏。「既询问了……事」等[语],是连同以「在何处制定」等[语]所显示的[部分]、把其余[部分]也一并摄集起来加以显示而说的。「在第一条波罗夷[中]」者:即在第一条波罗夷的圣典[之文]中(《波罗夷》24);正因如此[义注]说了「因为诸如来连一个文字也不会无义地说」。

Etadagganti eso aggo. Liṅgavipallāsena hi ayaṃ niddeso. Yadidanti ca yo ayaṃ, yadidaṃ khandhapañcakanti vā yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ āvuso upāli pārājikaṃ kattha paññatta’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu tassa saṅgītiyā purimakāle paṭhamabhāvo na yuttoti? No na yutto, bhagavatā paññattānukkamena pātimokkhuddesānukkamena ca paṭhamabhāvassa siddhattā. Yebhuyyena hi tīṇi piṭakāni bhagavato dharamānakāle ṭhitānukkameneva saṅgītāni, visesato vinayābhidhammapiṭakānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Vatthumpi pucchī’’tiādi ‘kattha paññatta’ntiādinā dassitena saha tadavasiṭṭhampi saṅgahetvā dassanavasena vuttaṃ. Paṭhamapārājiketi paṭhamapārājikapāḷiyaṃ (pārā. 24), tenevāha – ‘‘na hi tathāgatā ekabyañjanampi niratthakaṃ vadantī’’ti.
缅 1.24已对照篇首

长部诵者们说「《本生》等[被]结集于论藏」,[其理是]:摄于小部的《本生》等,既多分是法之说示,则把[它们]结集于同样[是法之说示]的论藏中是恰当的;而非[结集]于《长部》等类的经藏中,也非[结集]于是施设之说示的律藏中。而此中[长部诵者]不[另]取《所行藏》与《佛种姓》,是由于[它们]与《本生》同类[而已被摄]。而中部诵者们则说「依事之生起(aṭṭhuppatti)而教说的《本生》等,由于是随顺之教说,把[它们]结集于同样[是随顺之教说]的经藏中是恰当的;而非[结集]于是自性法之说示、[即]如法之教诫的论藏中」,[如是]说《本生》等是摄于经藏的。而此中应审察何者为恰当而后取。

Jātakādike khuddakanikāyapariyāpanne, yebhuyyena ca dhammaniddesabhūte tādise abhidhammapiṭake saṅgaṇhituṃ yuttaṃ, na pana dīghanikāyādippakāre suttantapiṭake, nāpi paññattiniddesabhūte vinayapiṭaketi dīghabhāṇakā ‘‘jātakādīnaṃ abhidhammapiṭake saṅgaho’’ti vadanti. Cariyāpiṭakabuddhavaṃsānañcettha aggahaṇaṃ, jātakagatikattā. Majjhimabhāṇakā pana ‘‘aṭṭhuppattivasena desitānaṃ jātakādīnaṃ yathānulomadesanābhāvato tādise suttantapiṭake saṅgaho yutto, na pana sabhāvadhammaniddesabhūte yathādhammasāsane abhidhammapiṭake’’ti jātakādīnaṃ suttantapiṭakapariyāpannataṃ kathayanti. Tattha ca yuttaṃ vicāretvā gahetabbaṃ.
PTS 1.30已对照篇首

如是依因相、用途、时、处、作者、方法诸类别显示了第一次结集之后,如今为于其中已确立而成就的法与律[得]种种善巧故,为显示[依味]一种等的差别,[义注]说了「如是,这[全部佛语]」等[语]。此中,「解脱之味」者:即解脱的功德;或即以解脱为成就者,因为[它]令成办最上之果;或即解脱的作用,因为[它]令成办对诸烦恼的究竟解脱。而有些[师]说是「解脱的滋味」。

Evaṃ nimittapayojanakāladesakārakakaraṇappakārehi paṭhamaṃ saṅgītiṃ dassetvā idāni tattha vavatthāpitasiddhesu dhammavinayesu nānappakārakosallatthaṃ ekavidhādibhede dassetuṃ ‘‘evameta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha vimuttirasanti vimuttiguṇaṃ, vimuttisampattikaṃ vā, aggaphalanipphādanato, vimuttikiccaṃ vā, kilesānaṃ accantaṃ vimuttisampādanato. Keci pana ‘‘vimuttiassāda’’nti vadanti.
已对照篇首

纵然一切佛语不加区别地[说]都是律,因为[能]调伏烦恼;[也]都是法,因为[能]令依所教诫而行道者不堕恶趣等;然而,为拣择此处所意指的法与律,[义注便]说了「此中,律藏[是律]」等[语]。其余的佛语是法,因为多分依蕴等而教说自性法。或者,纵然律也正是法——由于[同是]教理(pariyatti)等之性——然而在「律」一语近旁、以异所依之性而用的「法」一语,[则]显示与律之圣典(tanti)相异的圣典,犹如「福与智之资粮」以及「牛与牡牛(gobalibaddha)」[之例]。

Kiñcāpi avisesena sabbampi buddhavacanaṃ kilesavinayanena vinayo, yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne apāyapatanādito dhāraṇena dhammo, idhādhippete pana dhammavinaye niddhāretuṃ ‘‘tattha vinayapiṭaka’’ntiādimāha. Avasesaṃ buddhavacanaṃ dhammo, khandhādivasena sabhāvadhammadesanābāhullato. Atha vā yadipi dhammoyeva vinayopi, pariyattiyādibhāvato, vinayasaddasannidhāne pana bhinnādhikaraṇabhāvena payutto dhamma-saddo vinayatantividhuraṃ tantiṃ dīpeti yathā ‘‘puññañāṇasambhārā, gobalibaddha’’nti ca.
PTS 1.31缅 1.25已对照篇首

「无数生的轮回中」——这首偈颂是世尊在观察自己那作为一切知智之近因的阿罗汉[果]之证得时、紧接第十九观察智之后所说的。因此[义注]说「此是最初佛语」。据说这[偈]是一切诸佛所不舍的自说。这[偈]的略义是:我寻觅这自体之屋的造者、[即]爱之木匠,[而]在燃灯[佛]足下为了那能以之见到它的菩提智而作了至上愿(abhinīhāra);[自那时起]这么长的时间里,于无数生的轮回、[即]数达无数十万生的轮回之流转中,不得[见]、[即]不得不获那智,[就这样]流转、[即]轮转[至今]。由于这名为「生」者因杂有老、病、死而一再受之为苦,又由于在它[即造屋者]未被见到时[生]并不止息,所以[偈中]义为「寻觅它而流转」。「你已被见到」者:如今[你]已被正通达一切知智的我见到了。「再[造]屋」者:即再[造]这称为自体的我的屋。「你不会造」者:即不将造。你的一切无余的、[即]烦恼之椽木已被我折断。这由你所造的自体之屋的屋顶、[即]称为无明的屋顶圆饰(kaṇṇikamaṇḍala)已毁坏、[即]已被摧毁。「离行」即涅槃;如今我的心[以彼]作所缘而已至、[即]已入于[它];而我已证得、[即]已获得、已到达称为诸爱之尽的阿罗汉道。这[偈]是以意所转起的诸法之初。而「当诸法显现时」(《自说》1、2、3)这[偈],[诸师]说是以语所转起的诸法之初。据说世尊是依内心默念而说了「无数生的轮回中」等[偈](《法句》153)。「于初一日」这[语]不应与「已证得一切知性者」这[语]相连,而应与「观察[缘之行相]时所生起的」这[语]相连。因为世尊正是在卫塞月的满月[日]的黎明时分证得一切知性的。

‘‘Anekajātisaṃsāra’’nti ayaṃ gāthā bhagavatā attano sabbaññutañāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ arahattappattiṃ paccavekkhantena ekūnavīsatimassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa anantaraṃ bhāsitā. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ paṭhamabuddhavacana’’nti. Idaṃ kira sabbabuddhehi avijahitaṃ udānaṃ. Ayamassa saṅkhepattho – ahaṃ imassa attabhāvagehassa kārakaṃ taṇhāvaḍḍhakiṃ gavesanto yena ñāṇena taṃ daṭṭhuṃ sakkā, tassa bodhiñāṇassatthāya dīpaṅkarapādamūle katābhinīhāro ettakaṃ kālaṃ anekajātisaṃsāraṃ anekajātisatasahassasaṅkhyaṃ saṃsāravaṭṭaṃ anibbisaṃ taṃ ñāṇaṃ avindanto alabhantoyeva sandhāvissaṃ saṃsariṃ. Yasmā jarāvyādhimaraṇamissatāya jāti nāmesā punappunaṃ upagantuṃ dukkhā, na ca sā tasmiṃ adiṭṭhe nivattati, tasmā taṃ gavesanto sandhāvissanti attho. Diṭṭhosīti idāni mayā sabbaññutañāṇaṃ paṭivijjhantena diṭṭho asi. Puna gehanti puna imaṃ attabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ mama gehaṃ. Na kāhasi na karissasi. Tava sabbā avasesākilesaphāsukā mayā bhaggā. Imassa tayā katassa attabhāvagehassa kūṭaṃ avijjāsaṅkhātaṃ kaṇṇikamaṇḍalaṃ visaṅkhataṃ viddhaṃsitaṃ. Visaṅkhāraṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena gataṃ anupaviṭṭhaṃ idāni mama cittaṃ, ahañca taṇhānaṃ khayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattamaggaṃ ajjhagā adhigato pattosmīti. Ayaṃ manasā pavattitadhammānamādi. ‘‘Yadā have pātubhavanti dhammā’’ti (udā. 1, 2, 3) ayaṃ pana vācāya pavattitadhammānaṃ ādīti vadanti. Antojappanavasena kira bhagavā ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’ntiādimāha (dha. pa. 153). ‘‘Pāṭipadadivase’’ti idaṃ ‘‘sabbaññubhāvappattassā’’ti na etena sambandhitabbaṃ, ‘‘paccavekkhantassa uppannā’’ti etena pana sambandhitabbaṃ. Visākhapuṇṇamāyameva hi bhagavā paccūsasamaye sabbaññutaṃ pattoti.
已对照篇首

「[诸行是]坏灭法」者:[世尊]以无常相之门也显明了诸行的苦相与无我相,因为有「凡无常者即是苦,凡苦者即是无我」(《相应部》3.15;《无碍解道》2.10)之语。又应知:[世尊]正以显明三相之法而显示以彼为所缘的毗婆舍那时,[便]阐明了非一切外道之境、为佛所独有、以四谛业处为依处、不颠倒的趣涅槃之道。如今[世尊]以「当以不放逸成就」而于其中的正行道[上]策励[他们]。或者,[世尊]以「诸行是坏灭法」这[语]略而令[他们]悚惧之后,[便]以「当以不放逸成就」这[语]、正[以]略[说]而显示了无余的正行道。因为「不放逸」一句是遍取了三学所摄的完全圆满的教而住的。

Vayadhammāti aniccalakkhaṇamukhena dukkhānattalakkhaṇampi saṅkhārānaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.15; paṭi. ma. 2.10) vacanato. Lakkhaṇattayavibhāvananayeneva ca tadārammaṇaṃ vipassanaṃ dassento sabbatitthiyānaṃ avisayabhūtaṃ buddhāveṇikaṃ catusaccakammaṭṭhānādhiṭṭhānaṃ aviparītaṃ nibbānagāminippaṭipadaṃ pakāsetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Idāni tattha sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ niyojeti ‘‘appamādena sampādethā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘vayadhammā saṅkhārā’’ti etena saṅkhepena saṃvejetvā ‘‘appamādena sampādethā’’ti saṅkhepeneva niravasesaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ dasseti. Appamādapadañhi sikkhāttayasaṅgahitaṃ kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ sāsanaṃ pariyādiyitvā tiṭṭhatīti.
缅 1.26已对照篇首

「于第一次结集时未结集的」者:即〈结集犍度〉、《论事》等。而有些[师]说「《须婆经》(《长部》1.444)也是于第一次结集时未结集的」;然而那[说]不成立。因为[那经]是在第一次结集之前,由住于祇树林的尊者阿难对须婆青年所说的。

Paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ asaṅgītaṃ saṅgītikkhandhakakathāvatthuppakaraṇādi. Keci pana ‘‘subhasuttampi (dī. ni. 1.444) paṭhamasaṅgītiyaṃ asaṅgīta’’nti vadanti, taṃ pana na yujjati. Paṭhamasaṅgītito puretarameva hi āyasmatā ānandena jetavane viharantena subhassa māṇavassa bhāsitanti.
已对照篇首

「以坚固作与松缓作为用途[的随制]」者:[此二]依次是于世间之罪与制罪的诸学处中[的]。「因此」者:即由「方法多样」等。「此」者:即「由方法多样、方法殊胜」[等]偈语。「此[之]」者:即律的。

Daḷhikammasithilīkaraṇappayojanā yathākkamaṃ pakatisāvajjapaṇṇattisāvajjesu sikkhāpadesu. Tenāti vividhanayattādinā. Etanti vividhavisesanayattāti gāthāvacanaṃ. Etassāti vinayassa.
PTS 1.32已对照篇首

「自利、他利等差别[之义]」者:凡诵习、听闻、教诵、思察、教说那经者,经所摄集的戒等之义也成为他的;又由于[他]应以之令他人成办,[故]也成为他人的——那经[便]指示、[即]显示这二者。同样,以「等」一语摄取了「现法的与后世的」、「世间的与出世间的」等等差别之义。而这「义」一语是「利益」的同义语,不是「所说之义」[之语];若是[后者],则会说成「经既指示自己的所说之义,也[指示]他人的[所说之义]」这样的义。又[如此则成]「凡经所阐明之义即唯是它的」,[而]并非由它指示了他利;[如此]由于没有应由它指示的、[即]应被遮除的他利,[偈中]「义」一语的采用也就不应作了。又由于没有脱离自利、他利的[其他]所说之义,「等」一语的采用也不应作了。所以,由于如上所说的「利益」同义语之义在经[自身]中不可得,[故]是就受持经的人而说了自利与他利。

Attatthaparatthādibhedeti yo taṃ suttaṃ sajjhāyati, suṇāti, vāceti, cinteti, deseti ca, suttena saṅgahito sīlādiattho tassāpi hoti, tena parassa sādhetabbato parassāpi hotīti, tadubhayaṃ taṃ suttaṃ sūceti dīpeti. Tathā diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaṃ lokiyalokuttarañcāti evamādibhede atthe ādi-saddena saṅgaṇhāti. Attha-saddo cāyaṃ hitapariyāyavacanaṃ, na bhāsitatthavacanaṃ, yadi siyā, suttaṃ attanopi bhāsitatthaṃ sūceti, parassāpīti ayamattho vutto siyā. Suttena ca yo attho pakāsito so tasseva hotīti, na tena parattho sūcito hoti, tena sūcetabbassa paratthassa nivattetabbassa abhāvā atthagahaṇañca na kattabbaṃ. Attatthaparatthavinimmuttassa bhāsitatthassa abhāvā ādiggahaṇañca na kattabbaṃ. Tasmā yathāvuttassa hitapariyāyassa atthassa sutte asambhavato suttadhārassa puggalassa vasena attatthaparatthā vuttā.
PTS 1.33缅 1.27已对照篇首

或者,不顾及经[自身],在「不为其他义、不求称誉与利得」这一句的义释中(《大义释》63;《小义释》85)所说的自利等诸义之类别——「自利、他利、两者之利、现法之义、后世之义、浅显之义、甚深之义、隐覆之义、覆藏之义、应引申之义、已引申之义、无过之义、无烦恼之义、净白之义、胜义」——经指示那些[义],[偈]义即如此。在这一义的分说中,「义」一语也是「所说之义」的同义语。因为此中前五种义之类别是「利益」的同义语,此后的六种是「所说之义」的差别,而后面的[四种]则具二者之性。此中,由于难以证达,[故]于显明[时]得不到立足处的是「甚深」。不敞露的是「隐覆」。如根与水等被土[所覆]一般,由字之排列等而被遮蔽的是「覆藏」。应拣择而后令知的是「应引申」。应依字面而了知的是「已引申」。「无过」「无烦恼」「净白」是依同义语而说的;或者是依善、异熟、[无记]作用之法而说的。「胜义」即涅槃;或者正是诸法的不颠倒自性。或者,[经]以「[他]自己也是少欲的」而指示自利,以「又对他人作少欲之论」而指示他利。如是应联结「[他]自己也离杀生」等(《增支部》4.99、265)诸经。又应与律、阿毗达摩相区别而说「经」一语之义。所以,由依所化者的意乐而转起的教说,自利、他利等是格外被阐明的,因为[那教说]以彼为主;而非由依教令与自性法而转起的[教说所阐明]——正因此[义]才说了「由指示诸义故[为]经」。

Atha vā suttaṃ anapekkhitvā ye attatthādayo atthappabhedā vuttā ‘‘na haññadatthatthipasaṃsalābhā’’ti etassa padassa niddese (mahāni. 63; cūḷani. 85) ‘‘attattho, parattho, ubhayattho, diṭṭhadhammiko attho, samparāyiko attho, uttāno attho, gambhīro attho, gūḷho attho, paṭicchanno attho, neyyo attho, nīto attho, anavajjo attho, nikkileso attho, vodāno attho, paramattho’’ti te suttaṃ sūcetīti attho. Imasmiṃ atthavikappe attha-saddo bhāsitatthapariyāyopi hoti. Ettha hi purimakā pañca atthappabhedā hitapariyāyā, tato pare cha bhāsitatthabhedā, pacchimakā pana ubhayasabhāvā. Tattha duradhigamatāya vibhāvane aladdhagādho gambhīro. Na vivaṭo gūḷho. Mūludakādayo viya paṃsunā akkharasannivesādinā tirohito paṭicchanno. Niddhāretvā ñāpetabbo neyyo. Yathārutavasena veditabbo nīto. Anavajjanikkilesavodānā pariyāyavasena vuttā, kusalavipākakiriyādhammavasena vā. Paramattho nibbānaṃ, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvo eva vā. Atha vā ‘‘attanā ca appiccho hotī’’ti attatthaṃ, ‘‘appicchākathañca paresaṃ kattā hotī’’ti paratthaṃ sūceti. Evaṃ ‘‘attanā ca pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hotī’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.99, 265) suttāni yojetabbāni. Vinayābhidhammehi ca visesetvā sutta-saddassa attho vattabbo. Tasmā veneyyajjhāsayavasappavattāya desanāya attahitaparahitatādīni sātisayaṃ pakāsitāni hoti tapparabhāvato, na āṇādhammasabhāvavasappavattāyāti idameva ca ‘‘atthānaṃ sūcanato sutta’’nti vuttaṃ.
已对照篇首

又于经中,教令与自性法是随顺所化者的意乐的;而不像在律与阿毗达摩中那样、[是]所化者的意乐[随顺]教令与自性法。所以,经之教说是导致诸所化者一向获得利益的——[义注]故说「又此中[诸义]是善说的」等[语]。「产生」者:即结果。为阐明「由善护故」这[语]之义,[义注]说了「又它善护它们」。又应联结[如下二义]:经于自利等的安立中是准量,以及经是自利等的摄集者——因为经以阐明那些义为主。又应联结[经]与律、阿毗达摩的区别。「此」者:即「由指示诸义故」等义之语[偈]。「此[之]」者:即经的。

Sutte ca āṇādhammasabhāvā ca veneyyajjhāsayaṃ anuvattanti, na vinayābhidhammesu viya veneyyajjhāsayo āṇādhammasabhāve. Tasmā veneyyānaṃ ekantahitapaṭilābhasaṃvattanikā suttantadesanā hotīti ‘‘suvuttā cetthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pasavatīti phalati. ‘‘Suttāṇā’’ti etassa atthaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘suṭṭhu ca ne tāyatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Attatthādividhānesu ca suttassa pamāṇabhāvo, attatthādīnañca saṅgāhakattaṃ yojetabbaṃ tadatthappakāsanapadhānattā suttassa. Vinayābhidhammehi visesanañca yojetabbaṃ. Etanti ‘‘atthānaṃ sūcanato’’tiādikaṃ atthavacanaṃ. Etassāti suttassa.
PTS 1.34已对照篇首

「[我的诸苦受剧烈地]增进」者:此中 abhi 一语显示行进之作用的增长之性、[即]超过之性;「被称知、被标志」者:此中[显示]知与标[相]之作用的极显著之殊胜;「以殊胜的[容色]」者:此中[显示]容色的殊胜性、[即]卓越性——[如此解]是恰当的,因为前缀是作用的修饰者。而[设难:]「王中之王」、「阿毗律」中,abhi 一语是于受尊崇的与被限定的王与律[上]转起的——这[说]如何成立呢?[答:]由于[abhi]显示尊崇与限定之作用,又由于王与律是与那些作用相应的。因为此中,正如「超胜的花环(atimālā)」等中的 ati 一语一般,abhi 一语由于是连同成就[语]一并说作用的,[故]「王中之王」、「阿毗律」诸语[得以]成立;同样,于「阿毗达摩」一语中,abhi 一语也是连同成就[语]一并显示增长等之作用——应知[义注]所显示的正是这个义。

Abhikkamantīti ettha abhi-saddo kamanakiriyāya vuddhibhāvaṃ atirekataṃ dīpeti, abhiññātā abhilakkhitāti ettha ñāṇalakkhaṇakiriyānaṃ supākaṭatāvisesaṃ, abhikkantenāti ettha kantiyā adhikattaṃ visiṭṭhatanti yuttaṃ kiriyāvisesakattā upasaggassa. Abhirājā abhivinayeti pana pūjitaparicchinnesu rājavinayesu abhi-saddo pavattatīti kathametaṃ yujjeyyāti? Pūjanaparicchedanakiriyādīpanato, tāhi ca kiriyāhi rājavinayānaṃ yuttattā. Ettha hi atimālādīsu ati-saddo viya, abhi-saddo yathā saha sādhanena kiriyaṃ vadatīti abhirājaabhivinaya-saddā siddhā, evaṃ abhidhammasadde abhi-saddo saha sādhanena vuḍḍhiyādikiriyaṃ dīpetīti ayamattho dassitoti daṭṭhabbo.
缅 1.28已对照篇首

[义注]依修习与遍满之增长而说了具增长的诸法。「以所缘等」者:即以所缘、相应、业、门、道等。「不别异[而共通]的」者:即于彼此别异的律、经、阿毗达摩[三者]中不别异的、[即]共同的。义即「那『藏』一语」。「依已说的[方法]」者:即依「以这具二种义的[『藏』一语]」等所说的方法。

Bhāvanāpharaṇavuḍḍhīhi vuḍḍhimantopi dhammā vuttā. Ārammaṇādīhīti ārammaṇasampayuttakammadvārapaṭipadādīhi. Avisiṭṭhanti aññamaññavisiṭṭhesu vinayasuttābhidhammesu avisiṭṭhaṃ samānaṃ. Taṃ piṭakasaddanti attho. Yathāvuttenāti ‘‘evaṃ duvidhatthenā’’tiādinā vuttappakārena.
PTS 1.35已对照篇首

「教说」即以属于说者的教令等方式,对所应讲说之义的付与、[即]令觉悟。「教诫」即以属于所应教诫之人的、随[其]所犯等而应被教诫之性[而作]的教导、[即]调伏。「论」即对所应讲说的律仪与胜律仪等之义的讲说、[即]令[其]系属于语。或者,由于于此中被讲说,[故为]「论」。律仪与胜律仪之论[即]「律仪与胜律仪之论」。于其余[二者]中也是此法。「差别」一语应各别地联结:「应随其所应阐明教说之差别、教诫之差别与论之差别」。又「差别」义即种种性。学与诸断与甚深性[即]「学、断与甚深性」——亦应阐明那[些]。此中「如何」者:即以求过(upārambha)、度脱、守护法库为因的遍学,以及善行道、恶行道——[如是]以这些方式。由于堪施行教令,[故为]「堪施行教令者」——因为[世尊]是正等正觉者。由于言说与胜义[在律藏中]也实有,[故义注]说「多以教令[之方式]」。于此之后的[二者]中也是此法。「犯[戒]众多的」者:即施耶萨迦(Seyyasaka)等。「意乐」就是「意向(āsaya)」,就义而言[即]见与智。又说了这[偈]——

Kathetabbānaṃ atthānaṃ desakāyattena āṇādividhinā atisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanā. Sāsitabbapuggalagatena yathāparādhādisāsitabbabhāvena anusāsanaṃ vinayanaṃ sāsanaṃ. Kathetabbassa saṃvarāsaṃvarādino atthassa kathanaṃ vacanapaṭibaddhatākaraṇaṃ kathā. Kathīyati vā etthāti kathā. Saṃvarāsaṃvarassa kathā saṃvarāsaṃvarakathā. Esa nayo itaresupi. Bheda-saddo visuṃ visuṃ yojetabbo ‘‘desanābhedaṃ sāsanabhedaṃ kathābhedañca yathārahaṃ paridīpaye’’ti. Bhedanti ca nānattanti attho. Sikkhā ca pahānāni ca gambhīrabhāvo ca sikkhāppahānagambhīrabhāvaṃ, tañca paridīpaye. Ettha yathāti upārambhanissaraṇadhammakosarakkhaṇahetupariyāpuṇanaṃ suppaṭipatti duppaṭipattīti etehi pakārehi. Āṇaṃ paṇetuṃ arahatīti āṇāraho sammāsambuddhattā. Vohāraparamatthānampi sabbhāvato āha āṇābāhullatoti. Ito paresupi eseva nayo. Pacurāparādhā seyyasakādayo. Ajjhāsayo āsayova atthato diṭṭhi, ñāṇañca. Vuttañcetaṃ –
已对照篇首

「常见与断见,以及于随顺[法]中的认可[=随顺的认可];

‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhi ca, khanti cevānulomike;
已对照篇首

又凡如实之智——这[便]被称为『意向(āsaya)』。」(《清净道论大复注》1.136)

Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaddita’’nti. (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.136);
已对照篇首

「随眠」者:即依欲贪、有贪、见、瞋、疑、慢、无明而[成]七种的未来诸烦恼;过去与现在的[诸烦恼]也同样这样说。因为诸法并无由时之差别而[成]的自性之差别。「性行」者:即六种根本性行;依中间之差别而有种种,依相杂而成六十三种。而那些[性行]已由我们在〈无痴隐没经〉复注(asammohantaradhānasuttaṭīkā)中依分类而显示了,有需要者应从那里取。或者,「性行」即所行;那[所行]依善行与恶行而有二种。名为「胜解」者:即众生依先前的熟习而[有]的爱好;它依劣与胜之差别而有二种。由于没有对密集的辨析,[故]依见、慢、爱而[成]「我、我所」之想者。「胜律仪(asaṃvara)」即大的律仪。因为此 a 字是增长之义,犹如「无学(asekkha)诸法」(《法集论》11)[中之 a 字——彼处亦取「超出于学」之增上义]。

Anusayā kāmarāgabhavarāgadiṭṭhipaṭighavicikicchāmānāvijjāvasena satta anāgatā kilesā, atītā paccuppannā ca tatheva vuccanti. Na hi kālabhedena dhammānaṃ sabhāvabhedo atthīti. Cariyāti cha mūlacariyā, antarabhedena anekavidhā, saṃsaggavasena tesaṭṭhi honti. Te pana amhehi asammohantaradhānasuttaṭīkāyaṃ vibhāgato dassitā, atthikehi tato gahetabbā. Atha vā cariyāti caritaṃ, taṃ sucaritaduccaritavasena duvidhaṃ. Adhimutti nāma sattānaṃ pubbaparicayavasena abhiruci, sā duvidhā hīnapaṇītabhedena. Ghanavinibbhogābhāvato diṭṭhimānataṇhāvasena ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti saññino. Mahanto saṃvaro asaṃvaro. Buddhiattho hi aya’makāro yathā ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 11).
PTS 1.36缅 1.29已对照篇首

「而于这三[藏]中[都有]这些法、义、教说、通达」者:[设难:]此中,圣典之义、圣典之教说与对圣典之义的通达都是以圣典(tanti)为境的,所以律藏等作为义、教说、通达之依处是恰当的;然而诸藏正是圣典本身,[如此则]它们作为法之依处如何成立呢?[答:]由于圣典之集是支分圣典的依处。因为集对于支分是依处而被说的,犹如「树上的枝」。又由于法等是难以深入的,所以由它们[而说]律等是甚深的——[义注]故说了律等的四种甚深性。所以不应如此诘难:「唯法等由于难以深入而是甚深的,律等[则]不[是]」——因为正是就律等[自身]的甚深性、[既]依正面[之门]、[又]依境与有境之门而说了[它]。因为律等[即是]法,它们的境即义,而教说与通达是以法与义为境的。此中,应知法与义的难以深入之性是由于通达[它们]之难为,教说的[难以深入之性]是由于教说之智之难为;而通达的难以深入性,[则]应知是由于[它]不能被[他人]生起,又由于以彼为境之智的生起之难为。

Tīsupi cetesu ete dhammatthadesanā paṭivedhāti ettha tantiattho tantidesanā tantiatthapaṭivedho ca tantivisayā hontīti vinayapiṭakādīnaṃ atthadesanāpaṭivedhādhārabhāvo yutto, piṭakāni pana tanti yevāti tesaṃ dhammādhārabhāvo kathaṃ yujjeyyāti? Tantisamudāyassa avayavatantiyā ādhārabhāvato. Avayavassa hi samudāyo ādhārabhāvena vuccati, yathā – ‘‘rukkhe sākhā’’ti. Dhammādīnañca dukkhogāhabhāvato tehi vinayādayo gambhīrāti vinayādīnañca catubbidho gambhīrabhāvo vutto. Tasmā dhammādayo eva dukkhogāhattā gambhīrā, na vinayādayoti na codetabbametaṃ samukhena, visayavisayīmukhena ca vinayādīnaṃyeva gambhīrabhāvassa vuttattā. Dhammo hi vinayādayo, tesaṃ visayo attho, dhammatthavisayā ca desanāpaṭivedhoti. Tattha paṭivedhassa dukkarabhāvato dhammatthānaṃ, desanāñāṇassa dukkarabhāvato desanāya ca dukkhogāhabhāvo veditabbo, paṭivedhassa pana uppādetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā, tabbisayañāṇuppattiyā ca dukkarabhāvato dukkhogāhatā veditabbā.
已对照篇首

[设难:]以「于因之智[是]法无碍解」这一语,法之为因性如何可知呢?——由于[义注]是为显示「法无碍解」这一复合词的成分词之义,才说了「于因之智」。因为在「于法[而有]无碍解(dhamme paṭisambhidā)」这[分析]中,[义注]为显示「于法」这一[语]之义而说了「于因」,又为显示「无碍解」这一[语]之义而说了「智」。所以,「因」与「法」二语同义,「智」与「无碍解」二语[亦同义]——由说这层义者,法之为因性便得成立;而义之为因之果性,也应正这样看。

‘‘Hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā’’ti etena vacanena dhammassa hetubhāvo kathaṃ ñātabboti? ‘‘Dhammapaṭisambhidā’’ti etassa samāsapadassa avayavapadatthaṃ dassentena ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇa’’nti vuttattā. ‘‘Dhamme paṭisambhidā’’ti ettha hi ‘‘dhamme’’ti etassa atthaṃ dassentena ‘‘hetumhī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘paṭisambhidā’’ti etassa ca atthaṃ dassentena ‘‘ñāṇa’’nti. Tasmā hetudhamma-saddā ekatthā, ñāṇapaṭisambhidā-saddā cāti imamatthaṃ vadantena sādhito dhammassa hetubhāvo, atthassa hetuphalabhāvo ca evameva daṭṭhabbo.
PTS 1.37缅 1.30已对照篇首

而此中,「如其法(yathādhammaṃ)」中的「法」一语摄取因与因之果的一切。因为这[语]是说自性的,不是说教理[之性]与因性的;所以「如其法」者,义即凡是无明、行等之法,[便]于那一一[法]之中。或者,[与]法相随顺[即]「如其法」。因为教说也如通达一般,由于阐明不颠倒的自境,[故]随顺于法而转起;由此[它]被称为「不颠倒之称说」。 「[作]法之称说(dhammābhilāpa)」者:即显明义的、不颠倒的称说。以此[语,义注]显示「于那法之词说之称说上的智[是]词无碍解」(《分别论》718)此处所说的自性法之词说(nirutti),因为教说以声为自性。正是如此,词无碍解的小所缘等之性已在《无碍解分别》的圣典中(《分别论》749)说了;而义注中也以「以那自性之语的声为所缘」等语(《分别论义注》642)显示了[它]以声为所缘之性。因为确立了「这声是这义的能诠」这一能说与所说之后,依阐明那各各所说而令转起的声[即]「教说」。 以「或[即]依顺等之力而作的讲说」这[语],[义注]显示那法之词说的称说、讲说[即]那语之令转起。 以「意趣」这[语],[义注]显示:「『教说』即施设」这一语是就法之词说之称说而说的,不是就离于那[称说]的施设而说的。

Yathādhammanti cettha dhamma-saddo hetuṃ hetuphalañca sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Sabhāvavācako hesa, na pariyattihetubhāvavācako, tasmā yathādhammanti yo yo avijjāsaṅkhārādidhammo, tasmiṃ tasminti attho. Dhammānurūpaṃ vā yathādhammaṃ. Desanāpi hi paṭivedho viya aviparītasavisayavibhāvanato dhammānurūpaṃ pavattati, yato ‘aviparītābhilāpo’ti vuccati. Dhammābhilāpoti atthabyañjanako aviparītābhilāpo, etena ‘‘tatra dhammaniruttābhilāpe ñāṇaṃ niruttipaṭisambhidā’’ti (vibha. 718) ettha vuttaṃ sabhāvadhammaniruttiṃ dasseti, saddasabhāvattā desanāya. Tathā hi niruttipaṭisambhidāya parittārammaṇādibhāvo paṭisambhidāvibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ (vibha. 749) vutto. Aṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘taṃ sabhāvaniruttiṃ saddaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā’’tiādinā (vibha. aṭṭha. 642) saddārammaṇatā dassitā. ‘‘Imassa atthassa ayaṃ saddo vācako’’ti vacanavacanīye vavatthapetvā taṃtaṃvacanīya vibhāvanavasena pavattito hi saddo desanāti. ‘‘Anulomādivasena vā kathana’’nti etena tassā dhammaniruttiyā abhilāpaṃ kathanaṃ tassa vacanassa pavattanaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Adhippāyo’’ti etena ‘‘desanāti paññattī’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ dhammaniruttābhilāpaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na tabbinimuttaṃ paññattiṃ sandhāyāti dasseti.
PTS 1.38已对照篇首

[设难:]岂不是在「『法』即圣典(tanti)」这一分下,由于法以声为自性,法与教说便无有差别了吗?——不[然]。由于是各各义之能觉者而被了知的、又依领受等之力而先前已确立的声之相续[即]「法」;后来为使他人觉了而令转起的、开显那[法]之义的声[即]「教说」。 或者,如上所说之声的令生起者[即]心生起,[那便]是教说,犹如妄语等[一般]。而「[即]那语之令转起」也依如上所说的心生起而得成立。因为它使语转起,而那[语]也由它而被令转起、被教说。 为以「凡以何种方式而现观」「所现观者为何」「其自性为何」[这三者]使以「而它[有]世间与出世间[二种]」如是所说的现观明白,[义注]才说了「依境与依无痴——[是]于诸法中随顺于义」等语。因为此中,依境而于诸法等中随顺于义等的觉了,[即]以无明等之法、行等之义、及此二者之施设为所缘的世间现观;依无痴而于诸法等中随顺于义等的觉了,[即]以涅槃为所缘、与道相应的、摧毁对如上所说的法、义、施设[之]迷惑的出世间现观。 为显示除现观之外另一种通达之义,[义注]才说了「或者,[通达]即对那各各[处所说的各各诸法]」等语。因为依「通达之作即通达」这一语义[而言即]是现观;而依「被通达故为通达」[这一语义],那各各色等法的不颠倒自性也被称为「通达」。

Nanu ca ‘‘dhammo tantī’’ti imasmiṃ pakkhe dhammassa saddasabhāvattā dhammadesanānaṃ viseso na siyāti? Na, tesaṃ tesaṃ atthānaṃ bodhakabhāvena ñāto, uggahaṇādivasena ca pubbe vavatthāpito saddappabandho dhammo, pacchā paresaṃ avabodhanatthaṃ pavattito tadatthappakāsako saddo desanāti. Atha vā yathāvuttasaddasamuṭṭhāpako cittuppādo desanā, musāvādādayo viya. ‘‘Vacanassa pavattana’’nti ca yathāvuttacittuppādavasena yujjati. So hi vacanaṃ pavatteti, tañca tena pavattīyati desīyati. ‘‘So ca lokiyalokuttaro’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ abhisamayaṃ yena pakārena abhisameti, yaṃ abhisameti, yo ca tassa sabhāvo, tehi pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘visayato asammohato ca atthānurūpaṃ dhammesū’’tiādimāha. Tattha hi visayato atthādianurūpaṃ dhammādīsu avabodho avijjādidhammasaṅkhārādiatthatadubhayapaññāpanārammaṇo lokiyo abhisamayo, asammohato atthādianurūpaṃ dhammādīsu avabodho nibbānārammaṇo maggasampayutto yathāvuttadhammatthapaññattīsu sammohaviddhaṃsano lokuttaro abhisamayoti. Abhisamayato aññampi paṭivedhatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tesaṃ tesaṃ vā’’tiādimāha. ‘Paṭivedhanaṃ paṭivedho’ti iminā hi vacanatthena abhisamayo, ‘paṭivijjhīyatīti paṭivedho’ti iminā taṃtaṃrūpādidhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvo ca ‘‘paṭivedho’’ti vuccatīti.
缅 1.31已对照篇首

为以如上所说的法等[四者]显示诸藏的甚深性,[义注]说了「如今,由于在这些藏中」等语。 「以及此中(yo cettha)」者:应[这样]连作——于这各各藏中所有的法等之中凡有的通达,以及于这些藏中那些那些法所有的不颠倒自性。 而难以深入之性应知正是:由于无明、行等之法与义难通达;由于令它们被知是难作的,[而言]那[法义]之教说;由于称为通达之作的通达,其令生起与令成境是不可能[办到]的;又由于称为不颠倒自性的通达难以了知。

Yathāvuttehi dhammādīhi piṭakānaṃ gambhīrabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idāni yasmā etesu piṭakesū’’tiādimāha. Yo cetthāti etesu taṃtaṃpiṭakagatesu dhammādīsu yo paṭivedho, etesu ca piṭakesu tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ yo aviparītasabhāvoti yojetabbaṃ. Dukkhogāhatā ca avijjāsaṅkhārādīnaṃ dhammatthānaṃ duppaṭivijjhatāya, tesaṃ paññāpanassa dukkarabhāvato taṃdesanāya, paṭivedhanasaṅkhātassa paṭivedhassa uppādanavisayikaraṇānaṃ asakkuṇeyyattā, aviparītasabhāvasaṅkhātassa paṭivedhassa duviññeyyatāya eva veditabbā.
PTS 1.39已对照篇首

「就它(yaṃ)」者:[义注]是就那教理之恶把持而说的。「义(atthaṃ)」者:即所说之义与所为之义。「不详察(na upaparikkhanti)」者:即不思择。「不堪于谛观(na nijjhānaṃ khamanti)」者:即不堪于谛观之慧;意趣是不经谛观、以慧见了、认可而受持。「如是(iti)」者:即如是以这教理。「以脱免他说为利益」——[他们]以脱免他人加于自己之上的论难为效用而学法;「脱免他说」或[即]脱免讥嫌。「而他们为之(yassa catthāya)」者:即为圆满戒等,或为无取着之解脱(anupādāvimokkha)之义而学法——意趣是依正理而学。「其(assa)」者:即这法的。「不领受(nānubhonti)」者:即不得着。他们那些法由于被恶把持,[故]由成为求过(upārambha)、慢(māna)、傲(dappa)、覆蔑(makkha)、攀齐(paḷāsa)等之因,而「长夜导致不利与苦」。 「于库藏中任职者」[即]「库藏者(bhaṇḍāgārika)」;「如库藏者一般」[故亦]为「库藏者」,[即]守护法宝者。「不顾其余之义,唯作为库藏者本身[而有]的教理」[即]「库藏者之教理」。

Yanti yaṃ pariyattiduggahaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atthanti bhāsitatthaṃ, payojanatthañca. Na upaparikkhantīti na vicārenti. Na nijjhānaṃ khamantīti nijjhānapaññaṃ nakkhamanti, nijjhāyitvā paññāya disvā rocetvā gahetabbā na hontīti adhippāyo. Itīti evaṃ etāya pariyattiyā. Vādappamokkhānisaṃsā attano upari parehi āropitavādassa niggahassa pamokkhappayojanā hutvā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, vādappamokkhā vā nindāpamokkhā. Yassa catthāyāti yassa ca sīlādipūraṇassa anupādāvimokkhassa vā atthāya dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti ñāyena pariyāpuṇantīti adhippāyo. Assāti assa dhammassa. Nānubhontīti na vindanti. Tesaṃ te dhammā duggahitattā upārambhamānadabbamakkhapalāsādihetubhāvena dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti. Bhaṇḍāgāre niyutto bhaṇḍāgāriko, bhaṇḍāgāriko viya bhaṇḍāgāriko, dhammaratanānupālako. Aññatthaṃ anapekkhitvā bhaṇḍāgārikasseva sato pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti.
已对照篇首

「唯是那[三明]的(tāsaṃyeva)」这一限定[之语],[义注]是就所应获得的六神通、四无碍解等于律中并无分类之宣说而说的。因为于〈毗兰若品〉中(《波罗夷》12)唯分别了三明。 而在第二[藏]中,「唯是那[六神通]的」这一限定[之语]是顾及四无碍解而作的,不是[顾及]三明;因为那[三明]含摄于六神通之中,故于经中[已]被分别了。

‘‘Tāsaṃyevā’’ti avadhāraṇaṃ pāpuṇitabbānaṃ chaḷabhiññācatuppaṭisambhidādīnaṃ vinaye pabhedavacanābhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Verañjakaṇḍe (pārā. 12) hi tisso vijjāva vibhattā. Dutiye pana ‘‘tāsaṃyevā’’ti avadhāraṇaṃ catasso paṭisambhidā apekkhitvā kataṃ, na tisso vijjā. Tā hi chasu abhiññāsu antogadhāti sutte vibhattā yevāti.
PTS 1.40已对照篇首

「便作恶把持」——[即]以「我如是了知世尊所说之法:正是这同一个识在流转、在轮回,而非另一个」等[语](《中部》1.396)。 「法之思察(dhammacintaṃ)」者:即对法之自性的审察,[如]「唯以心生起本身[便]有布施」「心自己即是自己的所缘」「一切心[皆]以非自性法为所缘」等等。 「它们的(tesaṃ)」者:即那些藏的。

Duggahitaṃ gaṇhāti, ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi, yathā tadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ sandhāvati saṃsarati anañña’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.396). Dhammacintanti dhammasabhāvavicāraṇaṃ, ‘‘cittuppādamatteneva dānaṃ hoti, sayameva cittaṃ attano ārammaṇaṃ hoti, sabbaṃ cittaṃ asabhāvadhammārammaṇa’’nti ca evamādi. Tesanti tesaṃ piṭakānaṃ.
缅 1.32已对照篇首

「这(etaṃ)」者:即这佛语。由于随顺于义,[故为]「随顺[于义]者」。为阐明[它]正是随顺[于义]之性,[义注]才说了「而[这部]为何」等语。「任何一部(ekanikāyampi)」者:即任何一个聚集。布尼迦与支佉利迦[二者]是刹帝利,他们的住处[即]「布尼迦部」与「支佉利迦部」。

Etanti etaṃ buddhavacanaṃ. Atthānulomato anulomiko. Anulomikataṃyeva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekanikāyampīti ekasamūhampi. Poṇikā cikkhallikā ca khattiyā, tesaṃ nivāso poṇikanikāyo cikkhallikanikāyo ca.
已对照篇首

「九分(navappabhedaṃ)」——此中,如何[是]九分呢?因为有偈的经[是]应颂,无偈的经[是]记说;而脱离此二者、又不具「自说」等别名的经是不存在的——那本该成为「经」支的[是什么]呢?并且《吉祥经》等(《小诵》5.2;《经集》225)由于[是]偈之性,便不该被经支所摄,如《法句》等之例;或该被应颂支所摄,由于[是]有偈之性,如《有偈品》之例;同样,《两部分别》等中有偈的部分[也当如此]。——答曰:

Navappabhedanti ettha kathaṃ navappabhedaṃ? Sagāthakañhi suttaṃ geyyaṃ, niggāthakañca suttaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ, tadubhayavinimuttañca suttaṃ udānādivisesasaññārahitaṃ natthi, yaṃ suttaṅgaṃ siyā, maṅgalasuttādīnañca (khu. pā. 5.2; su. ni. 225) suttaṅgasaṅgaho na siyā, gāthābhāvato, dhammapadādīnaṃ viya, geyyaṅgasaṅgaho vā siyā, sagāthakattā, sagāthavaggassa viya, tathā ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu sagāthakappadesānanti? Vuccate –
已对照篇首

「『经』是通规, 其余是别规;

‘‘Suttanti sāmaññavidhi, visesavidhayo pare;
已对照篇首

[以]有因相故、以已成通称故、 以与他俱故、以不由他故。」(《要义灯复注》1.〈第一次大结集论释义〉)

Sanimittā niruḷhattā sahatāññena nāññato’’. (sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā);
已对照篇首

因为于一切佛语「经」这[名]是通规。正因如此,具寿大迦旃延在《导论》中说「九分的经之寻求」(《导论·摄集栏》)。而「世尊的[教语]有这么多是经所摄、经所属(《波逸提》255、1242),于自宗有五百经」(《法集论义注·因缘论》;《论事义注·因缘论》)等[语],也是成立这层义的[依据]。

Sabbassāpi hi buddhavacanassa suttanti ayaṃ sāmaññavidhi. Tenevāha āyasmā mahākaccāno nettiyaṃ – ‘‘navavidhasuttantapariyeṭṭhī’’ti (netti. saṅgahavāra). ‘‘Ettakaṃ tassa bhagavato suttāgataṃ suttapariyāpannaṃ (pāci. 255, 1242), sakavāde pañcasuttasatānī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā; kathā. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) evamādi ca etassa atthassa sādhakaṃ.
PTS 1.41缅 1.33已对照篇首

「其余是别规、[以]有因相故」——[即]在它的一分一分上,应颂等别规是依这个那个因相而立的。因为应颂的有偈之性正是它[得名]的因相;因为世间也把有诗颂、有偈的(《导论义注》13)散文之典称为「应颂」。而在无偈时,作问[而]答之性[便]是记说[得名]的因相;因为问答称为「解说(byākaraṇa)」,解说本身即「记说(veyyākaraṇa)」。 [设难:]若如此,则有偈等[经]中以作问而答的方式转起的[经],岂不也成了记说?——不成。因为「应颂」等名[于此]无有余地,并且[前文]已以「在无偈时」而作了限定。因为正是这样:于《法句》等纯偈所成[之经]中、于纵有偈而与喜悦智所成之偈相应[之经]中、于与「此是[世尊]所说」等语相连属[之经]中、以及于与未曾有法相应的诸别经中,「偈颂」「自说」「如是语」「未曾有法」之名依次而立;同样,纵有偈所成之性,于显明世尊过去诸生中行[持]之威力的[诸经]中「本生」之名[便]立;纵有问答之性与有偈之性,于某些经中由得智(veda)而「智解」之名[便]立——如是,依这个那个有偈之性等因相,于那些那些别经中应颂等之名得立,故应颂等别规是经支之外的其余[诸支]。而此中凡无应颂支等因相的,那便是「经」支,因为[它]是舍别名而以通名转起的。 [设难:]「有偈的经是应颂,无偈的经是记说,[则]经支不得成立」这一诘责,岂不仍在原处?——不在原处,因为已被净治了;因为前面已净治:「在无偈时,作问而答之性[便]是记说[得名]的因相」。

Visesavidhayo pare sanimittā tadekadesesu geyyādayo visesavidhayo tena tena nimittena patiṭṭhitā. Tathā hi geyyassa sagāthakattaṃ tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Lokepi hi sasilokaṃ sagāthakaṃ (netti. aṭṭha. 13) cuṇṇiyaganthaṃ ‘geyya’nti vadanti. Gāthāvirahe pana sati pucchaṃ katvā vissajjanabhāvo veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Pucchāvissajjanañhi ‘byākaraṇa’nti vuccati, byākaraṇameva veyyākaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sante sagāthakādīnampi pucchaṃ katvā vissajjanavasena pavattānaṃ veyyākaraṇabhāvo āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati, geyyādisaññānaṃ anokāsabhāvato, ‘gāthāvirahe satī’ti visesitattā ca. Tathā hi dhammapadādīsu kevalaṃ gāthābandhesu, sagāthakattepi somanassañāṇamayikagāthāyuttesu, ‘vuttañheta’ntiādivacanasambandhesu, abbhutadhammapaṭisaṃyuttesu ca suttavisesesu yathākkamaṃ gāthāudānaitivuttakaabbhutadhammasaññā patiṭṭhitā, tathā satipi gāthābandhabhāve bhagavato atītāsu jātīsu cariyānubhāvappakāsakesu jātakasaññā, satipi pañhāvissajjanabhāve, sagāthakatte ca kesuci suttantesu vedassa labhāpanato vedallasaññā patiṭṭhitāti evaṃ tena tena sagāthakattādinā nimittena tesu tesu suttavisesesu geyyādisaññā patiṭṭhitāti visesavidhayo suttaṅgato pare geyyādayo. Yaṃ panettha geyyaṅgādinimittarahitaṃ, taṃ suttaṅgaṃ visesasaññāparihārena sāmaññasaññāya pavattanatoti. Nanu ca sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇanti suttaṅgaṃ na sambhavatīti codanā tadavatthā vāti? Na tadavatthā, sodhitattā. Sodhitañhi pubbe gāthāvirahe sati pucchāvissajjanabhāvo veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimittanti.
PTS 1.42已对照篇首

而所说的「《吉祥经》等(《小诵》5.1、2、3)由于[是]偈之性便不该被经支所摄」——那不[然],因为已成通称。因为《吉祥经》等的「经」之性已成通称;因为它们并不像《法句》《佛种姓》等那样以偈之性而被知,而正是以经之性[被知]。正因如此,义注中才作了「以经为名的」这一名称的取用。 而所说的「由于[是]有偈之性便该被应颂支所摄」——那也不[然],因为与他俱。因为「与诸偈俱」故为「有偈的」;而所谓「俱」之性依义[必]是与他[物],而在《吉祥经》等中并没有哪一处脱离偈的经分可被称为「与诸偈俱」,也没有什么所谓的聚合体。而所说的「《两部分别》等中有偈的部分该被应颂支所摄」——那也不[然],因为不由他;因为那些偈另有所属,[它们]属于本生等所摄,所以不能由它们而使《两部分别》等有应颂支之性。如是应知经等诸支彼此并无相混。

Yañca vuttaṃ – ‘‘gāthābhāvato maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ (khu. pā. 5.1, 2, 3) suttaṅgasaṅgaho na siyā’’ti, taṃ na, niruḷhattā. Niruḷho hi maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttabhāvo. Na hi tāni dhammapadabuddhavaṃsādayo viya gāthābhāvena paññātāni, atha kho suttabhāvena. Teneva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘suttanāmaka’’nti nāmaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Yañca pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘sagāthakattā geyyaṅgasaṅgaho siyā’’ti, tadapi natthi, yasmā sahatāññena. Saha gāthāhīti hi sagāthakaṃ. Sahabhāvo nāma atthato aññena hoti, na ca maṅgalasuttādīsu kathāvinimutto koci suttapadeso atthi, yo ‘saha gāthāhī’ti vucceyya, na ca samudāyo nāma koci atthi, yadapi vuttaṃ – ‘‘ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu sagāthakappadesānaṃ geyyaṅgasaṅgaho siyā’’ti tadapi na, aññato. Aññā eva hi tā gāthā jātakādipariyāpannattā. Ato na tāhi ubhatovibhaṅgādīnaṃ geyyaṅgabhāvoti. Evaṃ suttādīnaṃ aṅgānaṃ aññamaññasaṅkarābhāvo veditabbo.
已对照篇首

[义注]以「如是,这依不分别」等语显示:由以「这是法……乃至……这是律,这些是八万四千法蕴」[之语]确立佛语为法与律等之差别而结集[它]的、以大迦叶为首的得自在者(vasī)之众,以那为许多稀有[之事]的显现所庄严的结集,确立了这《长部》的初、中佛语等之性。

‘‘Ayaṃ dhammo…pe… ayaṃ vinayo, imāni caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti buddhavacanaṃ dhammavinayādibhedena vavatthapetvā saṅgāyantena mahākassapappamukhena vasigaṇena anekacchariyapātubhāvapaṭimaṇḍitāya saṅgītiyā imassa dīghāgamassa paṭhamamajjhimabuddhavacanādibhāvo vavatthāpitoti dasseti, ‘‘evametaṃ abhedato’’tiādinā.
已对照篇首

〈因缘论〉释义,终。

Nidānakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.